JP7630862B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines installed in amusement parks, etc.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that is equipped with a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, runs a variable display game involving a variable display on the variable display device, and derives the result of the variable display game by stopping the variable display through a stop operation by the player, and generates a specific gaming state advantageous to the player depending on the derived result of the variable display game.
Furthermore, in recent gaming machines, there are also known gaming machines that allow the player to stop the variable display multiple times in one variable display game, thereby giving the player multiple opportunities to perform a stop operation (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-083374 A

However, there was room for improvement in conventional gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming state control means capable of controlling a first gaming state and a second gaming state to which a transition can be made from the first gaming state, a variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information, a first gaming control means capable of executing a first game capable of awarding a gaming value for executing a game with the variable display of the variable display means, a second gaming control means capable of executing a second game, which is a pseudo game to which the gaming value cannot be awarded, with the variable display of the variable display means, a winning role determination means capable of determining a winning role when the first game is executed, a point awarding means capable of awarding points based on the winning role determined by the winning role determination means in the first gaming state, a point storage means capable of storing points awarded by the point awarding means, and a control means for switching to the second gaming state based on the points stored in the point storage means. and a determination means capable of determining whether or not to cause a transition to the second game state, the winning roles include a first winning role and a second winning role different from the first winning role, the point awarding means is controllable to award points when the first winning role is determined, and is controllable to award more points when the second winning role is determined than when the first winning role is determined , the variable display means is capable of displaying the variable-displayed identifying information in a static manner in a specific manner in the second game based on the determination by the determination means to cause a transition to the second game state, and the variable display means is configured to include a notification means capable of executing a notification based on the points stored in the point storage means when notifying an operation for statically displaying the identifying information in the second game in the specific manner by the variable display means .

1 is a schematic front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of reels in the first embodiment. This is a diagram to explain the pattern combinations that result when the push order bell role is won in the first embodiment. 13 is a diagram for explaining the pattern combinations when a color bell role is won in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the flow of play of the gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the display contents on the main display device in the first embodiment. A figure showing the presentation at the start of the pseudo bonus state in variant example 1 of the first embodiment. A figure showing the presentation at the start of the AT state in variant example 2 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the control configuration of a gaming machine in a second embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the display contents on the main display device in the second embodiment. A timing chart to explain the navigation state during the bonus state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation at the start of bonus 1 state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment. A figure showing the presentation at the start of bonus 2 state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the navigation state during the bonus state in variant example 2 of the second embodiment. This is a timing chart to explain the navigation state during the bonus 2 state in variant example 2 of the second embodiment. A timing chart for explaining the navigation state and the presentation content of the main display during the bonus state in variant example 4 of the second embodiment. A diagram for explaining the flow of the game regarding the bonus state and RT state in the gaming machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a three-bet game on a gaming machine according to a third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the payout of roles and the drawing of roles in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of reels in a third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the ceiling number of games in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used to determine the bonus when the ceiling number of games is reached on the main control device in the third embodiment. A figure showing a preview presentation of a pseudo game on the main display in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when executing a pseudo game on the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when upgrading the pseudo game level in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when a weak table is used in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop symbol sequence when a strong table is used in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when using a Gachi table in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when using the special 1 table in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when using the special 2 table in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when the special 3 table is used in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining a high probability state in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used to determine a bonus when a winning combination is achieved on the main control device in the third embodiment. A diagram showing a lottery table used during the CZ state in the main control device in the third embodiment. A figure showing the presentation on the main display when a pseudo bonus state is won during the CZ state in the third embodiment. This is a diagram showing an additional point lottery table used to determine additional points when drawing lots for an AT state during a pseudo bonus state in the main control device in the third embodiment. A figure showing the presentation on the main display when the AT state begins after the pseudo bonus state ends in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when transitioning to a specialized zone during an AT state in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams and tables for explaining the process of determining a pseudo-stop pattern sequence when using an AT table in an AT state in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used during a specialized zone in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the number of added games in the AT state in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the concealment preview performance in the sub-control device in the third embodiment. A figure showing the concealment preview performance of the pseudo game on the main display device in the third embodiment (when fully concealed). A figure showing a concealment preview performance of a pseudo game on the main display device in the third embodiment (when partially concealed). 13 is a timing chart for explaining a pseudo game in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the occurrence of an operation pseudo game on the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the execution mode of an operation pseudo game on the main control device in the fourth embodiment. A timing chart for explaining the starting state of the reels when push order navigation is executed after the notification pseudo-game in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the starting state of the reels when color navigation is executed after the notification pseudo game in the fourth embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
The slot machine 1 is installed in an amusement park or the like.
As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a front door 1a, a bet button 2a, a return button 2c, a performance button 2d, an upper performance button 2f, a medal insertion slot 2, a start lever 3, a reel 4, a stop button 5, a display window 6, a medal payout device 7, a medal payout outlet 7b, a main display 8, a speaker 9, a front panel 19, a lamp 11, a navigation lamp 12, an advantageous zone lamp 13, a probability setting device 14, a display decorative frame 15, a drum unit 4d, a main control device 10, and a sub-control device 20.

The main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 each have a memory unit and a control unit, and are devices capable of various calculation processes and various controls, and are included in the concept of a computer. Each memory unit has a storage device such as a semiconductor memory element that stores programs, information, etc. necessary for the operation of the slot machine 1. Each control unit has a CPU, etc. Each control unit realizes the various functions of the embodiment by appropriately reading and executing various programs, etc. stored in each memory unit.

[Schematic front view showing the appearance of the gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 is provided with a front door 1a at its front.
The front door 1a is pivotally attached to one side (left side as seen from the front) of a main body (not shown) that is disposed on the rear side of the front door 1a and attached to an island equipment (not shown), and is configured to be able to be opened and closed forward in a single-opening manner. Note that, hereinafter, the left and right directions are shown when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side.

A main display 8 is disposed at the center of the upper part of the front door 1a in the left-right direction when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The main display 8 is configured with a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of information, such as information related to effects (effect images), as will be described later, and constitutes a display means.
A display decorative frame 15 having an opening in the center is disposed above the front door 1a and in front of the main display 8, and the main display 8 is disposed with its display surface facing forward through the opening of the display decorative frame 15.

A speaker 9 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and is capable of outputting, for example, sound effects corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.
In addition, lamps 11 consisting of LEDs or the like are provided on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and are capable of outputting, for example, light when a winning combination is achieved or light of an illumination mode corresponding to the effects displayed on the main display 8.

An upper performance button 2f, which is an example of an operating means, is provided on the right side of the main display 8.
The upper performance button 2f is a push button that moves in the forward and backward directions, and the pushing operation of the upper performance button 2f is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output as operation information of the upper performance button 2f to the sub-control device 20. In addition, a light-emitting source (not shown) consisting of an LED or the like is provided inside the upper performance button 2f, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can notify that the operation of the upper performance button 2f is valid.

A flat front panel 19 having decorations and various function indications on its surface is disposed in the vertical center of the front door 1a of the slot machine 1.
Behind the front panel 19, there is disposed a drum unit 4d having a reel 4 as a variable display means.
Further, in the approximate center of the front panel 19, a display window 6 made of a light-transmitting material is formed, through which the symbols on the reels 4 can be seen from the front.

The reels 4 are composed of a left reel 4a, a center reel 4b, and a right reel 4c arranged in a left-right direction as individual variable display means, and the rotation axis of each of the reels 4a to 4c extends in the left-right direction, and the rotation center is set to be the same. The reels 4 (4a to 4c) have continuous patterns (identification information) on the periphery, and these patterns are configured to be identifiable from outside the machine through the display window 6, and by rotating the reels 4 in one direction, for example, the patterns can be displayed variably from top to bottom within the display window 6. Each of the reels 4a to 4c displays multiple patterns (for example, 20 patterns), and the types of patterns are, for example, "replay,""watermelon,""cherry,""bell,""7," etc.
The shape of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of symbols on the periphery may be other than 20.

Above the display window 6 on the front panel 19, navigation lamps 12a, 12b, and 12c capable of indicating the stopping sequence of the stop buttons 5, which will be described later, are disposed in correspondence with the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c.
In addition, a favorable zone lamp 13, for example, composed of an LED, is disposed on the lower left side of the display window 6 on the front panel 19. The favorable zone lamp 13 is controlled to light up during a favorable zone (described later). Note that, instead of the favorable zone lamp 13, the slot machine 1 may control to light up, for example, the "dot" portion of a 7-segment display (also called "7-seg") constituting a payout number display section that displays the number of medals paid out.

A sub-display 17 is disposed on the front panel 19 to the right of the display window 6 (reels 4).
The sub-display 17 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying multiple pieces of information, such as information related to the performance (performance image) as described below, and constitutes a display means.
The sub-display 17 has a smaller display area than the main display 8, but is disposed closer to the reel 4 than the main display 8, making it easy to visually recognize the displayed image while watching the reel 4 rotate and stop.
The sub-display unit 17 may be provided on the left side of the display window 6 (the reels 4). The sub-display unit 17 may be configured as a touch panel type display unit.

A step protruding forward is formed below the front panel 19, and a coin insertion slot 2, a bet button 2a, and a performance button 2d, which are exemplified as operating means, are disposed on the upper surface of the step.
The medal insertion slot 2 is a portion where a player inserts a medal (game medium). Inside the medal insertion slot 2, a medal selector 2b (medal detection means) which is a sensor or the like that detects a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 2 is provided.
The bet button 2a is a pressable button that allows the player to input the number of bets required to start a game, and allows the player to input the maximum number of bets permitted by the slot machine 1 with one operation.

The performance button 2d is a push button that moves up and down, and the pressing of the performance button 2d is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like and output to the sub-controller 20 as operation information of the performance button 2d. In addition, a light-emitting source (not shown) such as an LED is provided inside the performance button 2d, and the light emitted by the light-emitting source can notify that the operation of the corresponding performance button 2d is valid. The performance button 2d is disposed in a position closer to the reel 4 than the upper performance button 2f described above.

A start lever 3, a return button 2c, and a stop button 5, which is exemplified as an operating means (stop operating means), are disposed on the front surface of the stepped portion.
The start lever 3 is a lever that the player operates to start the game. After the number of bets is input, the start lever 3 becomes active and the game can start.
The return button 2c is a push button that moves back and forth, and is operated to cancel the set bet number or to pay out medals stored as credit medals.
The stop buttons 5 are buttons for stopping the spinning reels 4 and are composed of push-type buttons that move back and forth, with the left stop button 5a, center stop button 5b, and right stop button 5c being arranged at predetermined intervals horizontally corresponding to the left reel 4a, center reel 4b, and right reel 4c.

Below the front door 1a of the slot machine 1, there is a medal payout outlet 7b through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 7 are ejected.

[Block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine in the first embodiment]
FIG. 2 shows a block diagram of a control system in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
2, the slot machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 10 which performs the drawing of winning roles and the control of the progress of the game, and a sub-control device 20 which is configured to be able to communicate with the main control device 10 and performs various presentation controls based on control information from the main control device 10. The transmission of control information between the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 is limited to one direction only, from the main control device 10 to the sub-control device 20, to prevent the input of unauthorized signals from the sub-control device 20 to the main control device 10.

The main control device 10 is connected to the bet button 2a, medal selector 2b, return button 2c, start lever 3, stop button 5, probability setting device 14 (setting means), external output terminal 18, medal payout device 7, drum unit 4d, and advantageous zone lamp 13 by communication cables, and is capable of controlling each device. The main control device 10 also includes a memory unit (storage means) and a control unit.

The probability setting device 14, as a setting means, changes the winning probability of a specific game state (e.g., a pseudo-bonus state) into multiple stages (e.g., six stages), thereby allowing the degree of advantage for the player to be set in multiple stages, and the main control device 10 performs a process of setting the winning probability of a specific game state to one of multiple probability values with different probabilities based on the probability setting operation in the probability setting device 14.
The setting values set by the probability setting device 14 are: setting 1 has the lowest probability value, the higher the number, the higher the probability value, and setting 6 has the highest probability value. Therefore, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting to the player (the setting with the lowest degree of advantage), the higher the number, the more advantageous it is to the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting to the player (the setting with the highest degree of advantage).

In addition, the winning probability of a specific game state may be controlled by a fixed probability value without being affected by the setting value of the probability setting device 14.
In addition, by changing the probability of transitioning to the CZ state or the AT state depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, it is possible to change the player's degree of advantage in multiple stages.
In addition to the specific game state, the probability of winning a predetermined small role (for example, a bell role) may be made variable in multiple stages (for example, six stages).

The external output terminal 18 outputs information related to playing on the slot machine 1 to a management device (not shown) or a calling device (not shown) installed in the gaming establishment, and outputs information under the control of the main control device 10 to collect various data such as the number of games played on the slot machine 1, the number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the pseudo bonus state and AT state described below) and the transition period.

The drum unit 4d is a device integrally including the reels 4a to 4c and stepping motors (not shown) for rotating the reels 4a to 4c.
The medal payout device 7 has a medal storage section (not shown) that collects medals inserted into the medal selector 2b as medals before being paid out, and is a device that pays out the medals stored in the medal storage section to a medal payout outlet 7b. The medal payout device 7 is equipped with a sensor that detects the paid-out medals.
The medal selector 2 b is provided downstream of the medal insertion port 2 and is equipped with a sensor that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion port 2 .

The memory unit of the main control device 10 stores various information such as game programs related to the game, tables for drawing lots for minor winnings and AT states, etc.
Furthermore, the main control device 10 operates using a control unit and a storage unit in which programs are stored, thereby carrying out processes related to the progress of play on the slot machine 1 .

The main control device 10 performs processes such as starting the game and sampling random numbers from a random number generator (not shown) based on a signal from the start lever 3. It then performs lottery processing for winning combinations based on the sampled random numbers. It also performs random number generation processing, for example by updating the random numbers at predetermined timing, according to the control program in the storage unit, and performs lottery processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state (described below), lottery processing for continuation during the AT state, lottery processing for adding extra points during the AT state, etc., based on the generated random numbers.

That is, the main control device 10 is provided with a lottery means for determining whether or not to award a special prize such as a small prize, a pseudo bonus state, or an AT state in response to the execution of a game.
In addition, the selection pattern using random numbers may be other than the patterns mentioned above, and the hand may be selected based on random numbers generated by software, and the transition to a pseudo bonus state or AT state, or an additional selection may be performed based on random numbers generated by a random number generator, or all selections may be performed using random numbers generated by software or random numbers generated by a random number generator.

The main control device 10 also controls the rotation of the reels 4 based on a signal from the start lever 3. The main control device 10 detects the rotational position of each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c based on signals from sensors (not shown) provided on each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c, and is therefore able to grasp the rotational position of the symbols on each of the reels 4a, 4b, 4c. Then, based on a signal from the stop button 5, it performs control to stop the desired symbol within the display window 6.

In addition, the main control device 10 realizes the game play of the slot machine 1 by controlling the game progress process involving internal lottery processing, management of various information stored in the memory unit, and devices such as the medal payout device 7 in response to the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 3.

The sub-controller 20 is connected to the performance button 2d, upper performance button 2f, speaker 9, main display 8, lamp 11, navigation lamp 12, and sub-display 17 via communication cables, and is capable of communicating with them. The sub-controller 20 controls these devices in response to control information from the main control unit 10. The sub-controller 20 also includes a memory unit and a control unit.

The memory unit of the sub-controller 20 stores various information such as programs related to performance, performance image data, audio data, etc.
The sub-controller 20 operates by a control unit and a storage unit in which a program is stored, and performs processing such as effects synchronized with play on the slot machine 1 in response to commands (control information) from the main controller 10. For example, it controls the main display 8, the lamps 11, the speaker 9, etc. to output effect images and sound effects that indicate a transition in the game state, and lamp effects.

In addition, the sub-controller 20 is capable of controlling the switching timing of each effect based on a signal from the effect button 2d.
Either one or both of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 constitute the specific stop control means (first specific stop control means, second specific stop control means), first notification means (first stop operation notification means), second notification means (second stop operation notification means), first specific game state control means, second specific game state control means, first specific game state lottery means, notification control means, lottery means, presentation control means, change control means, first game control means, second game control means, stop pattern determination means, bonus granting means, notification means, special presentation control means, and selection means in the present invention.

[Reel arrangement in the first embodiment]
Next, the arrangement of the reels 4 as an example of the variable display means will be described with reference to FIG.
The reel 4 as a variable display means is composed of a left reel 4a, a center reel 4b, and a right reel 4c as individual variable display means, and each of the reels 4a to 4c displays a plurality (20) of symbols related to winning combinations and transitions in game states, with the arrangement of the symbols being different for each reel.

First, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the left reel 4a displays, in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19, "Blank", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Bell A", "Replay", "BAR", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Bell A", "Replay", "Red 7A", "Red 7B", "Watermelon", "Bell A", "Replay", "White 7", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Bell A", and "Replay".

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the middle reel 4b displays, in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19, "Blank", "Bell B", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "BAR", "Bell B", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Red 7A", "Bell A", "Replay", "White 7", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Bell A", "Replay", "Cherry", and "Watermelon".

As shown in FIG. 6(c), the right reel 4c displays, in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19, "Blank", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Red 7B", "Red 7A", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", and "Watermelon".

In the figure, each symbol is indicated to identify it, but the actual reel 4 has a predetermined design corresponding to each role.
In addition, "Bell A" and "Bell B", as well as "Red 7A" and "Red 7B", are each set with the same type of design and have the same overall design, but with some differences in the internal designs.
In addition, each of "BLANK", "BAR", "RED 7A", and "WHITE 7" is set as a special symbol, and the spacing between each special symbol on the left reel 4a is greater than the pull-in range for the symbol stop control described below, making it impossible to perform a stop operation aimed at multiple special symbols simultaneously on the winning line.

In addition, each special symbol is designed to make it easier to perform a so-called eye-pressing operation aimed at the special symbol than the other symbols, and is larger in shape than the other symbols and has a relatively eye-catching color scheme.
Furthermore, to facilitate the operation of distinguishing between the symbols "Blank,""BAR,""Red7A," and "White 7," for example, "Blank" is colored blue, "BAR" is colored black, "Red 7A" is colored red, and "White 7" is colored white.
In addition, "Red 7B" has the same color scheme as "Red 7A", and by arranging "Red 7A" and "Red 7B" side by side, it becomes easier to press the button. However, as described later, "Red 7B" has no effect on winning the role.
The symbol arrangement of reel 4 is set as described above.

Such a slot machine 1 is configured to be able to execute slot machine games such as those described below under the control of the main control device 10.

At the start of a game, medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, or the number of bets is set from credit medals by operating the bet button 2a.
Then, when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number (for example, three coins), one of the conditions for starting the game is met, and the player enters a state in which the player has the right to play one game and is therefore able to start the game.

In this state where the game can be started, the operation of the start lever 3 is valid. In this valid state, when the start lever 3 is tilted, all of the conditions for starting the game are met, the game starts, and the reels 4a to 4c on which multiple symbols are displayed start to move, and an internal lottery process is executed to determine in advance, before the reels 4 stop, the lottery results of the current game for multiple roles such as replay roles and small roles (including misses), pseudo bonus states, and transitions to AT states.
In the internal lottery process, a winning combination for the current game is determined by lottery from among a plurality of winning combinations based on a predetermined winning probability. For example, a lottery result such as a replay combination or a bell combination is derived by lottery.

Furthermore, even if the main control device 10 receives a signal from the start lever 3, if the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the reel 4 in the previous game has not yet passed a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds), the main control device 10 performs a limiting control to limit the number of games executed per unit time (e.g., one minute) to within a predetermined number (e.g., 14 times) by temporarily waiting (inserting a waiting time) before starting rotation of the reel 4, thereby delaying the start of rotation of the reel 4. In other words, the main control device 10 is provided with a game number limiting means capable of limiting the number of games executed per unit time to within a predetermined number. With this control, the shortest execution time required for one game is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 4.1 seconds).
In addition, the period for monitoring the above-mentioned shortest execution time may be set based on a point other than the point at which the reel 4 starts to rotate between games. For example, it may be based on the point at which the stop button 5 is activated, or any point may be used as the base as long as it is possible to monitor the number of games per unit time.

When the game is started, the rotation speed of each of the reels 4a to 4c gradually increases from a stopped state, and then reaches a steady rotation state where the reels rotate at a constant speed.
When the reels reach this steady rotation, the stop buttons 5a to 5c provided corresponding to the reels 4a to 4c become operable by pressing them.

When each of the stop buttons 5a to 5c is pressed in this state, the reels 4a to 4c are controlled to stop with a combination of symbols permitted by the timing of the operation and the lottery result of the internal lottery process.
The stopping control of each reel 4a to 4c has a pull-in range set for each, and a predetermined number of symbols (for example, four) in the reverse rotation direction (upward) from the symbol at the time the stopping operation is performed can be pulled in, and only any of the symbols within this pull-in range can be stopped on a winning line.

In the stopped state, three consecutive patterns displayed in the vertical direction on each of the reels 4a to 4c stop (stopped display) so that they face outside the machine through the display window 6, and the presence or absence of a win is determined based on the state of the stopped display at this time.
The winning combination is determined based on the combination of symbols that stop on the middle winning line that connects the middle symbols of each reel 4 in the display window 6.

Winning combinations such as small wins and replays are determined based on the combination of symbols on such winning lines.
Small roles include, for example, bell, watermelon, and cherry.

There are two bell roles, each with a different corresponding symbol combination. For example, there is a push order bell role, which forms the symbol combination of "Bell A" and "Bell B" in the display window 6, and a color bell role, which forms a symbol combination of one of the special symbols on the left reel 4a and "Bell A" on the center reel 4b and right reel 4c.

Furthermore, there are six push order bell roles 1 to 6 in which, when the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in one push order (specific push order) out of six possible push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c", "5c → 5b → 5a", etc.), a specific pattern stops on each of the reels 4a to 4c (individual variable display means), and the corresponding combination of patterns is displayed in a specific order in the display window 6.

The push order bell role 1 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5a → 5b → 5c", and when the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the upper line in the display window 6.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), the symbols "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of sequence numbers 3 to 5 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Bell B", "Replay", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the symbols "Bell A", "Cherry", and "Watermelon" in the range of sequence numbers 2 to 4 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell B, Bell A" is displayed on the top line when the button press sequence is correct.
However, since the winning is judged on the middle winning line, the symbol combination of "Replay Replay Cherry" that actually stops on the middle winning line is judged to be the winning combination.

The push order bell role 2 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5a → 5c → 5b", and when the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the diagonally lower right line in the display window 6.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), the symbols "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of sequence numbers 3 to 5 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the symbols "Blank", "Replay", and "Bell A" in the range of sequence numbers 0 to 2 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" is displayed on the diagonally lower right line when the button press sequence is correct.
However, in reality, the symbol combination "Replay Bell A Replay" that stops on the middle winning line is determined to be the winning combination.

The push order bell role 3 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5b → 5c → 5a." When the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" stops on the middle winning line in the display window 6, and this symbol combination is judged to be a winning combination.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(c), the symbols "Watermelon", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 2 to 4 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, the symbols "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" is displayed on the middle line when the button press sequence is correct.

The push order bell role 4 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5b → 5a → 5c", and when the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the small hill-shaped line connecting the bottom, middle and bottom rows in the display window 6.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(d), the symbols "Bell B", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the symbols "Blank", "Replay", and "Bell A" in the range of sequence numbers 0 to 2 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" is displayed on a small hill-shaped line when the button press sequence is correct.
However, in reality, the symbol combination of "Watermelon Bell A Replay" that stops on the middle winning line is determined to be the winning combination.

The push order bell role 5 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5c → 5a → 5b", and when the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the upper right diagonal line in the display window 6.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(e), the symbols "Cherry", "Watermelon" and "Bell A" in the range of sequence numbers 6 to 8 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A" and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the symbols "Bell A", "Cherry" and "Watermelon" in the range of sequence numbers 2 to 4 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" is displayed on the upper right diagonal line when the button press sequence is correct.
However, in reality, the winning combination is determined to be the "Watermelon, Bell A, Cherry" symbol combination that stops on the middle winning line.

The push order bell role 6 is a push order bell role that can only win if the push order is "5c → 5b → 5a", and when the push order is correct, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the small V-shaped line connecting the top, middle and top rows in the display window 6.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the symbols "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of sequence numbers 3 to 5 are displayed in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 are displayed in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the symbols "Bell A", "Cherry", and "Watermelon" in the range of sequence numbers 2 to 4 are displayed in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the small V-shaped line when the button press sequence is correct.
However, in reality, the winning combination is determined to be "Replay, Bell, A, and Cherry" that stops on the winning line in the middle row.

As described above, when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the symbol combination that creates the winning push order bell role will stop on the winning line only when the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in the corresponding push order.
In other words, the main control device 10 constitutes a first specific stop control means that is capable of outputting the winning symbol combination of the push order bell role to the reel 4 as a first specific stop mode that can award a predetermined number of medals (e.g., six medals) as a first bonus based on the operation of the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell role as a first stop operation mode by the player.

In addition, when the push order bell role is won, regardless of which stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the first stop button 5 is operated in a specific push order, the reel 4 may be controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the push order bell role stops. In addition, the push order bell is not limited to six patterns, and three push order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
In addition, a common bell role that can be won without restrictions on the push order may be provided as a bell role in addition to the push order bell role.

On the other hand, the colored bell roles are Colored Bell Role 1, which wins when the symbol combination of "Blank, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line; Colored Bell Role 2, which wins when the symbol combination of "BAR, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line; Colored Bell Role 3, which wins when the symbol combination of "Red 7A, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line; and Colored Bell Role 4, which wins when the symbol combination of "White 7, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(a), color bell role 1 requires that the symbols "Replay", "Blank", and "Bell B" in the range of sequence numbers 19 to 1 stop in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, and that the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6 on the center reel 4b, and that the symbols "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 stop in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and that the symbol combination "Blank - Bell A - Bell A" stops on the middle winning line to win.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the color bell role 2 is a winning combination that requires the "Replay", "BAR", and "Cherry" symbols in the range of sequence numbers 4 to 6 to stop in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, the "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" symbols in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 to stop in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" symbols in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 to stop in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the "BAR, Bell A, Bell A" symbol combination to stop on the middle winning line.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the color bell role 3 requires that the symbols "Replay", "Red 7A", and "Red 7B" in the range of sequence numbers 9 to 11 stop in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, and that the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6 on the center reel 4b, and that the symbols "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 stop in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and that the symbol combination "Red 7A, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line to win.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), the color bell role 4 is a winning combination that requires the symbols "Replay", "White 7", and "Bell B" in the range of sequence numbers 14 to 16 to stop in the display window 6 on the left reel 4a, for example, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of sequence numbers 10 to 12 to stop in the display window 6 on the center reel 4b, and the symbols "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 to stop in the display window 6 on the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination "White 7, Bell A, Bell A" to stop on the middle winning line.

In addition, unlike the push order bell role, the color bell role can be won in any push order, but as mentioned above, the special symbols are spaced apart beyond the pull-in range, so to win, a push operation aimed at one of the special symbols on the left reel 4a, which acts as a specified individual variable display means, is required.

As described above, when any of the color bell symbols 1 to 4 is won, the symbol combination that creates the winning color bell symbol will stop on the winning line only if a pressing operation is performed aiming at the corresponding special symbol on the left reel 4a.
In other words, the main control device 10 constitutes a second specific stop control means that can cause the reel 4 to output a winning pattern combination of colored bells as a second specific stop mode that can award a predetermined number of medals (e.g., 15 medals) as a second bonus based on an operation by the player aiming at a special pattern corresponding to the winning colored bell.
In addition, while there may be an operation aimed at a special symbol on a specific reel 4, for the other reels 4, a winning symbol combination may be derived only when the reels 4 are stopped in a preset push order.

The watermelon role is a minor role (rare role) where the corresponding symbol combination is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon", and there are two types: a weak watermelon role where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on the upper line or lower line, and a strong watermelon role where "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on a right-upward line or a right-downward line.
The cherry role is a minor role (rare role) whose corresponding symbol combination is "Cherry-ANY-ANY", and there are two types of cherry roles: a weak cherry role in which "Cherry" stops on the top or bottom row of the left reel 4a, and a strong cherry role in which "Cherry" stops on the middle row of the left reel 4a.

There are two replay roles with different corresponding symbol combinations, a normal replay role (hereinafter referred to as a replay role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" and a chance replay role (chance role) with a corresponding symbol combination of "replay, bell, bell".
"Replay Bell Bell" (Chance Eye) is a combination of symbols that stops when a Chance Replay role is won, and along with the Watermelon and Cherry roles, it is set as a so-called rare role with a relatively low probability of winning in the internal lottery process.
As with the push-order bell symbol, the watermelon, cherry, and replay symbols will determine whether they win based on the symbols that stop on the middle winning line when each of the symbol combinations listed above stops.
Also, the cherry role and the watermelon role may be a type of replay role.

The symbols corresponding to the replay role and the push order bell role ("Bell A" or "Bell B") are set so as to always be within the pull-in range no matter when each reel 4 is stopped, so that so-called eye-pressing operation aimed at the "replay", "bell A" or "bell B" is not required. On the other hand, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 4a and the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 4b are arranged with a wider interval than the pull-in range in some places, so that when the cherry role is won, eye-pressing operation aimed at the "cherry" symbol is required when stopping the left reel 4a, and similarly, when the watermelon role is won, eye-pressing operation aimed at the "watermelon" symbol is required when stopping the center reel 4b.
In addition, the arrangement of the "cherry" symbols and the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 4 may be any arrangement as long as a pressing operation is required when the cherry or watermelon symbol is won.

In addition, the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can execute push order navigation for each game as a notification state regarding the push order bell role. The push order navigation is a state in which, when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the push order of the winning push order bell role is notified (push order navigation is executed) by the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12.
Therefore, when the push order navigation is executed, the player can win the winning push order bell role by simply stopping reel 4 in the instructed push order.

In other words, the sub-control device 20 constitutes a first stop operation notification means that can notify a player in a recognizable manner of the first stop operation mode that stops the winning pattern combination of the push order bell role in a game in which the winning pattern combination can be stopped as a first specific stop mode.
Furthermore, as a first stop operation mode, the sub-controller 20 notifies the user of the stop operation sequence for each of the reels 4a to 4c serving as a plurality of individual variable display means.

Similarly, a color navigation can be executed for each game as a notification state for the color bell combination. The color navigation is a state in which, when any of the color bell combinations 1 to 4 is won, the main display 8 notifies (executes the color navigation) the type of special symbol on the left reel 4a corresponding to the won color bell combination.
Therefore, when the color navigation is executed, the player can win the winning color bell role by performing an eye-pressing operation to aim at the notified special symbol on the left reel 4a.

In other words, the sub-control device 20 constitutes a second stop operation notification means that can notify the player in a recognizable manner of the second stop operation mode that stops the winning pattern combination of a color bell role in a game in which the winning pattern combination of a color bell role can be stopped as a second specific stop mode.
In addition, the sub-control device 20 notifies, as the second stop operation mode, a stop operation mode for causing the left reel 4a, which serves as a predetermined individual variable display means, to produce a predetermined pattern.
In this way, by implementing the push order navigation and color navigation, the player can easily win medals, and either the push order navigation or the color navigation is executed (activated) during the pseudo bonus state and AT state described below.

Based on the symbol combinations as described above, the winning of the small prize and the replay prize is judged (judgment means), and when the result of the judgment is that the symbol combination is a combination of symbols corresponding to each of the above, a win is achieved and a game value according to the achievement of each win is awarded.
For example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small prize such as a bell, a cherry, or a watermelon stops, it is determined that a small prize has been won, and the medal payout device 7 is driven and controlled to pay out a predetermined number of medals through the medal payout outlet 7b.

Specifically, when a combination of corresponding symbols is displayed in a stop state during the push order bell role, six medals are paid out.
In addition, when the push order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a push order other than the specific push order (five push orders) and the corresponding combination of symbols is not displayed, fewer than six medals (for example, one medal) will be paid out.

In addition, when a combination of corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed in the color bell role, 15 medals are paid out.
Furthermore, when a color bell combination is won, if any of the special symbols does not stop and appear on the middle winning line of the left reel 4a, no medals will be paid out.
In addition, for the push order bell role and the color bell role, the winning probability is set so that the number of medals held by the player increases during the pseudo bonus state and AT state described below.

In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak watermelon role and a strong watermelon role is stopped and displayed, two medals are paid out.
In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a weak cherry role and a strong cherry role is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out.
The number of medals paid out when a combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed may be other than the above-mentioned number.

In addition, the replay role and chance replay role are determined by the stopped display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role and chance replay role (chance role), and it is possible to play the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in the previous game without inserting medals (without setting the number of bets).

In addition, the winning probability of each role is set as follows for each setting value: Push Order Bell role > Color Bell role > Replay role > Weak Cherry role > Weak Watermelon role > Chance Replay role > Strong Watermelon role > Strong Cherry role, that is, the Bell role is the most likely to win, and the Strong Cherry role is the least likely to win. However, the winning probability of the Push Order Bell role here is the total value of each Push Order Bell role, and the same applies to the Color Bell role.
The relationship between the winning probabilities of each role may be other than that described above.
In addition, the weak cherry role, weak watermelon role, chance replay role (chance role), strong cherry role, and strong watermelon role are called rare roles, meaning that they are winning roles that are difficult to win.

[Game flow in the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
Next, the flow of a game on the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the gaming state in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
The main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 are capable of controlling the slot machine 1 to multiple gaming states, and perform various processes in each gaming state, control of transitions between gaming states (hereinafter simply referred to as "transitions"), etc. as follows.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is composed of multiple game states, including a normal game state, a CZ state, a pseudo bonus state, and an AT state. The main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 are capable of controlling the transition from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

The game of the slot machine 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section. These sections are divided according to the game state, and further divided according to a winning state for a game state advantageous to a player, such as an AT state.
As for the winning state for the game state advantageous to the player, a normal probability state and a high probability state are set as described below.
The normal section is a section that can be played in a normal gaming state, and includes a section in which a pseudo bonus state can be played in the normal gaming state by lottery with the lottery probability in the normal probability state.
In addition, during the normal period, lottery control may be performed so that the pseudo bonus state is not won.
In addition, in the normal period, the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state may be made an ultra-high probability state that is even higher than the high probability state. For example, in the normal period, if a specified rare role is won, the pseudo bonus state is always won.
After transitioning from the normal zone to another game state, the advantageous zone remains in place until returning to the normal zone again.

The advantageous zone includes zones playable in the CZ state, the precursor state of the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, the normal probability state and the high probability state of the pseudo-bonus state, the precursor state of the pseudo-bonus state, and the AT state. The main control device 10 counts the number of games played consecutively while in the advantageous zone. When the game state is in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone lamp 13 is lit.
In addition, the advantageous zone lamp 13 may be lit only while the player can actually recognize the state as advantageous, such as the CZ state, the pseudo bonus state, the AT state, etc. For example, the advantageous zone lamp 13 may not be lit during the high probability state of the pseudo bonus state.

After entering the advantageous zone, in order to end the advantageous zone, in addition to the case of moving to the normal zone due to the game lottery results, etc., the establishment of one of the following conditions is set: "the number of consecutive games in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number" or "the number of medals acquired during the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number." A limiting means (so-called limiter) is provided to limit the number of medals that can be acquired during a series of advantageous zones consisting of each state identified as an advantageous zone.

The above-mentioned conditions for ending the advantageous zone are merely examples, and may include, for example, "at least one push order bell has been announced." The above-mentioned conditions for ending the advantageous zone may include, for example, "a combination of symbols corresponding to a bonus role has been stopped and displayed," "a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning role of a first-class special role (a so-called regular bonus) has been stopped and displayed," etc. The upper limit on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous zone may be any number, such as 1,000 or 1,500, and the upper limit on the number of medals that can be won may be any number, such as 1,000 or 2,400.

Next, we will explain in detail for each game state (normal game state, CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) that is executed under the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, the transition process between game states, and the various effects that occur in conjunction with the transition process.

Unless otherwise specified below, the transition from each game state to another game state is basically after the third reel is stopped in the game in which the transition condition is met (or after the medals are paid out). However, this is not limited to this, and the transition may occur from the next game after the transition condition is met.
In addition, the effects include, for example, premonition effects (real premonition effects or fake premonition effects) and continuous effects, which will be described later, and include notifications of the awarding of a bonus through images (videos) on the main display 8 and the sub-display 17, sound effects from the speaker 9, and illumination from the lamp 11, as well as advance notifications before the bonus is awarded, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the awarding of the bonus.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state is the gaming state in which the player remains when the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in Fig. 6, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transition to the CZ state, pseudo bonus state, and AT state while in the normal gaming state. Depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may not be possible to directly transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state.

During the normal gaming state, an individual performance that is completed in one game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 with a predetermined probability.
The individual effects are mainly executed to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and include winning effects that are executed based on the results of a winning combination lottery by the main control device 10, which will be described later.
In addition, individual effects also include those that are executed based on the probability state at that time (normal probability state or high probability state), those that are executed to explain the game, etc.
The winning effect is an effect that is executed mainly to notify the result of the lottery for the role, and displays an item that can notify the winning rare role together with the appearance of a specified character, or displays text information such as "Chance" or "Hot" indicating the expectation of the occurrence of the AT state together with the appearance of a specified character, and displays an image according to the type of rare role that was won and the result of the lottery for the transition to the AT state that is triggered by the winning rare role.

Transition process from normal game state to pseudo bonus state (arrow a in FIG. 6)
In the normal gaming state, when the decision by the main control device 10 as to whether or not to grant a bonus is a predetermined special decision result, a pseudo-bonus state (bonus) is granted as a second specific gaming state.

More specifically, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state in advance based on the winning of a predetermined rare role as a specific lottery result. For example, the process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%) when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won.
The pseudo bonus state continues until a predetermined number of games have been played, during which a lottery for transition to the AT state is held. The pseudo bonus state will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the normal game state, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state when a specified rare role is won can be changed according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, which serves as a setting means. For example, when a chance role is won, the probability of entering the pseudo bonus state is 20% at setting 1, 22% at setting 2, 24% at setting 3, 26% at setting 4, 28% at setting 5, and 30% at setting 6.

The transition to the pseudo bonus state, i.e., the decision of whether or not to grant a special bonus, may be made by something other than the drawing of a rare role by the lottery means. For example, the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be decided when a specific role (e.g., a bell role) has been won (or the number of times it has actually been won) reaches a specific number, and a drawing of the pseudo bonus state may be held at that time. The transition to the pseudo bonus state may be decided when the number of games played since the previous pseudo bonus state or the end of the AT state reaches a specific number. Points may be added according to the drawing of roles, and the points to be added may be made changeable according to the type of role that has been won or the state in which the role has been won, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state may be decided when the points reach a specific number, or a drawing of the pseudo bonus state may be held at that time.

In addition, a pseudo bonus state may be generated during the AT state described below.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the winning combinations that trigger the pseudo bonus state are set to the chance combination and the strong cherry combination, but the pseudo bonus state may be drawn when other combinations are won.

If the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, a premonition effect (first specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 18 games) before the transition to the pseudo bonus state, in order to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In other words, even if the main control unit 10, as a lottery means, has determined in advance to transition to the pseudo bonus state, it does not immediately transition to the pseudo bonus state, but rather generates the pseudo bonus state after a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30) have been played from that point onwards, and the sub-control unit 20, based on the main control unit 10's determination in advance to generate the pseudo bonus state, controls the execution of this premonition effect as a premonition effect during the predetermined number of game execution periods prior to the transition to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, when a transition to a pseudo-bonus state has been predetermined as the awarding of a bonus, the sub-control device 20 is capable of executing this premonition effect as a specific effect (first specific effect) across multiple games during a predetermined period before the awarding of the bonus.

In addition, a waiting period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 games) is set between winning the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state and the execution of the actual premonition effect, and the actual premonition effect is executed after the end of this waiting period.
Therefore, even if the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, the state will not transition to the pseudo bonus state immediately, but will transition after a waiting period and the execution of the premonition performance.

During this premonition effect, the main display 8 switches to an image of a stage with a different background from that during the normal game state, and an effect image is executed on the premonition stage in which the character that appears performs an action different from that during the normal game state. For example, an effect on the premonition stage in which the character advances through a cave is executed throughout multiple games. The effect content itself does not change even when one game ends. For example, even if the screen is switched due to the occurrence of various events in a specific game, the effect content itself, such as the character advancing through a cave, continues to be executed in the next game without changing. Therefore, this premonition effect is a series of effects executed across multiple games.
In addition, multiple patterns with different backgrounds, etc. are prepared for the premonition stage, and one of the patterns of the premonition stage is selected under the control of the sub-controller 20 depending on whether or not a win has been made in the pseudo-bonus state at that time.

In addition, even if a rare role (e.g., a chance role) that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a fake premonition effect (second specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 18 games) to notify the player that they will not ultimately transition to the pseudo bonus state, just as when they win the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the fake premonition effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a rare role that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won but the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not won, or it may be executed always.

In other words, the sub-controller 20 is capable of executing a fake premonition effect as a specific effect (second specific effect) across multiple games based on the establishment of specified conditions when the main controller 10 has not previously determined the transition to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, regardless of whether the main control unit 10 as a bonus-granting means has previously decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus state, the sub-control unit 20 is capable of executing specific effects (real premonition effects or fake premonition effects) across multiple games that can indicate whether or not a bonus will be granted when specific conditions such as winning a chance role are met.

Also, when a fake premonition effect is executed, just as when the pseudo bonus state is won, a fake waiting period of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 games) is set between the winning of a rare role that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state and the execution of the fake premonition effect.
The real premonition effects and fake premonition effects are basically made up of a series of effects across multiple games in which the performance images (stages or characters that appear, etc.) are set in the same way, and by making the final content announced different, it is possible to keep the player's expectations captivated until the very end.

In addition, during the premonition effect (main premonition effect or fake premonition effect) and the waiting period (or fake waiting period), the occurrence rate of the winning effect executed in each game is increased compared to other normal game states, as will be described in detail later.
In particular, during the waiting period (or fake waiting period), premonition effects will occur afterwards, and each winning effect that occurs with an increased occurrence rate will act as a so-called teasing effect for the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state, heightening the player's sense of anticipation.
Other examples of teasing effects include increasing the appearance rate of a specific character during a winning effect, changing the color scheme of a character's dialogue image to something different from outside the teasing effect (for example, blue), or changing the background.

In addition, in the main premonition effect and the fake premonition effect, a notification is given as to whether or not the state will ultimately transition to a pseudo bonus state. In this case, the main display 8 executes a continuous effect (continuous effect) several games (e.g., two games) before the final game of the premonition effect. The continuous effect is executed, for example, as a battle effect consisting of an image in which the main character and enemy character battle each other for a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games).

In the continuous performance, a performance image in which the main character and enemy character repeatedly attack and defend is executed for each game, and the performance content of each game is carried over to the next game. For example, when the main character receives damage in a certain game, the damage is carried over to the next game (for example, a performance in which a meter showing the amount of damage is changed).
In addition, the offensive and defensive state between the main character and enemy character in each game is set depending on whether or not there is a transition to a predetermined pseudo-bonus state, and it is set so that when there is a transition to the pseudo-bonus state, there are more games in which the main character attacks than when there is no transition.
In other words, the continuous effects are a series of effects that are executed over (across) a number of games.
In addition, a button effect may be executed in parallel with the continuous effect.

If the pseudo bonus state is won (in the case of the actual premonition effect), an image of the main character ultimately winning is displayed to notify the player that the pseudo bonus state has been won, and if the pseudo bonus state is not won (in the case of the fake premonition effect), an image of the main character ultimately losing is displayed to notify the player that the pseudo bonus state has not been won.
In addition, instead of a continuous performance, a performance may be executed that is completed with only the final game of the main premonition performance and the fake premonition performance, and a notification regarding a transition to a pseudo bonus state may be given based on the result of that performance.

In addition, the main premonition effect and the fake premonition effect may be generated immediately when a rare combination that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won. In addition, the fake premonition effect may be generated without fail when a rare combination that triggers a transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, or may be generated with a predetermined probability.
The number of games for the real premonition effects and the fake premonition effects may be any number of games, or may be selectively determined from a number of numbers of games (e.g., 15 to 20 games).Similarly, the waiting period may be selectively determined from a number of numbers of games (e.g., 10 to 15 games), so that the waiting period can be varied.

The number of games that can be selected for the execution period of the real premonition effect and the fake premonition effect may be set to the same, but during the real premonition effect, it may be possible to select a number of games that would not be selected for the fake premonition effect. In this way, if the premonition effect ends after a small number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, or if the premonition effect continues for a large number of games that would be impossible for a fake premonition effect, the real premonition effect will be confirmed, making it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state, which have different winning probability states to transition to the pseudo bonus state. The winning probability of the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, and the transition of the probability state is controlled so that there is a 30% probability from the normal probability state when a weak watermelon or weak cherry role is won. On the other hand, as a specified fall condition, there is a 5% probability from the high probability state to the normal probability state when, for example, a replay role is won, a bell role is won, or a miss occurs.

The probability of winning in the pseudo bonus state is set, for example, at 20% when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the normal probability state, and at 50% when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won in the high probability state.
When the probability state changes from a normal probability state to a high probability state, the sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8 to notify the user that the state is high probability. For example, if a stage in which the main character moves through a grassland is displayed during normal game play, the background of the stage is changed from a daytime background to an evening background to notify the user that the state is high probability.

However, instead of definitely changing the stage when a high probability state is reached, a lottery for changing the stage is held with a predetermined probability (e.g., 30%) during the game in the high probability state, and the stage is changed only if the result of this lottery is won.
In addition, even during a game in a normal probability state, a lottery for changing to a stage is held with a predetermined probability (2%), and if this change lottery is won, control is performed to change to a stage indicating a high probability state.

On the other hand, even when staying on a stage with an evening background, a lottery for changing to a daytime background is held, and control is performed so that in a game in a normal probability state, there is a relatively high probability (e.g., 20%) of winning the change lottery, and in a game in a high probability state, there is a relatively low probability (e.g., 5%) of winning the change lottery.
Therefore, even if the stage has an evening background, it does not necessarily mean that the player is staying in a high probability state; a stage with an evening background merely suggests a high probability state.

In addition, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is changed or when the main control device 10 is reset, after passing through the normal zone and transitioning to the advantageous zone, actual play can begin in the normal game state under the normal probability state; however, for each setting value in the probability setting device 14, the normal game state may be started in a high probability state with a predetermined probability.
In addition, the pseudo bonus state may be won with different probabilities when a chance role and a strong cherry role are won.

Transition process from normal gaming state to CZ state (arrow c in FIG. 6)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the CZ state based on winning a specified rare role. For example, the transition process to the CZ state is performed with a specified probability (for example, 10%) when a strong watermelon role is won. The condition for transitioning to the CZ state is winning this transition lottery.

In addition, in the normal game state, the main control device 10 may change the winning probability state of the CZ state, for example, when a weak cherry role is won. Also, the sub-control device 20 may perform notification control for the winning probability state. When performing notification control, instead of directly notifying each probability state, the display content of the main display 8 may be changed to the extent that the player can predict which state the probability state is at that time.
In addition, in the normal game state, the probability of winning the CZ state when a specified rare role is won may be changeable according to a setting value in the probability setting device 14 as a setting means.

In addition, even if the player wins the lottery to transition to the CZ state, the player will not immediately transition to the CZ state, but will instead enter a CZ state waiting state (delay period) for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 5 to 8 games), and will wait for the transition to the CZ state during this time before transitioning to the CZ state.
Also, during the CZ state waiting state, control is performed to make the presentation content on the main display 8 different from other states, similar to the waiting period of the pseudo bonus state described above.

In other words, by increasing the occurrence rate of the winning effects executed in each game compared to other normal game states, the winning effects become so-called hype effects for the CZ state that occurs subsequently, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
Other examples of teasing effects include increasing the appearance rate of a specific character during a winning effect, changing the color scheme of a character's dialogue image to something different from outside the teasing effect (for example, blue), or changing the background.
Then, at the end of the game when the CZ state waiting state ends, the main display 8 notifies the player that the game will transition to the CZ state.

In addition, in order to heighten the player's anticipation for the transition to the CZ state, during the CZ state standby state, a continuous presentation of the CZ state for a predetermined number of games (e.g., two games) may be executed on the main display 8 to notify the player of the eventual transition to the CZ state.

In addition, even if a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won but the lottery for transition to the CZ state is not won, the presentation content on the main display 8 is controlled to be different from other states (so-called teasing presentation) for a specified number of games (for example, 5 to 8 games), similar to the above-mentioned delay period.
Therefore, when a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won, the player's sense of expectation is heightened for a specified period of time regardless of whether or not there is a transition to the CZ state.

In addition, a fake continuous performance of the CZ state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) to notify that the game will not ultimately transition to the CZ state may be executed on the main display 8. In this case, the characters that appear in the continuous performance of the CZ state and the fake continuous performance may basically be set to be the same, and the final notification content may be made different, so as to keep the player's expectations up to the end.
For example, as a continuous performance in the CZ state (or a fake continuous performance), a performance image may be executed in which the character challenges a sports competition through each game. In this case, during the continuous performance (or fake continuous performance), sports competitions are continuously executed through the games in between, and if the CZ state is won, an image is executed in which the character ultimately succeeds in the competition (for example, succeeds in scoring a goal in soccer), and if the CZ state is not won, an image is executed in which the character fails the competition.

In addition, during the CZ state standby state, a CZ state premonition effect (CZ main premonition effect or CZ fake premonition effect) similar to the premonition effect (main premonition effect or fake premonition effect) may be executed on the main display device 8, or a continuous effect or fake continuous effect may be executed at the final stage of the CZ state premonition effect (CZ main premonition effect or CZ fake premonition effect).
In addition, the period during which the teasing effect is performed when a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won may be any period during which multiple games are played, and the number of games may be determined from multiple game numbers based on a random number draw, or may be determined by a fixed number of games.

Transition process from normal gaming state to AT state (arrow g in FIG. 6)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state as the first specific game state based on winning a predetermined rare role. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this lottery.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a specified rare role is won, or may be made with a specified probability (e.g., 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this first embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via a pseudo-bonus state in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to be extremely low.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be won only in the case of a relatively high set value (e.g., setting 4 to 6).
In addition, in the normal game state, if the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won, a premonition effect similar to that which occurs when the pseudo-bonus state described above occurs is executed, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect ends.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the selection control of premonition effects different from that when the pseudo bonus state occurs may be performed. For example, when transitioning directly to the AT state, the selection rate of premonition effects consisting of characters and backgrounds that have a low appearance rate (or do not appear) in fake premonition effects may be made higher than when the pseudo bonus state occurs. Also, premonition effects that are not executed when the pseudo bonus state occurs may be executed only when transitioning directly to the AT state.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state, push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, but since the lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a higher probability in each game than in the normal game state, it is a game state in which it is easier to transition to the pseudo bonus state than when remaining in the normal game state.
Although push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, push order navigation may be executed when the push order bell role is won, or push order navigation may be executed a portion of the time when the push order bell role is won, i.e., with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%) when the push order bell role is won.

Since it is easier to transition to a pseudo-bonus state while in the CZ state than while in the normal game state, the CZ state is positioned as a chance zone in the flow of the game.
The maximum number of games that can be played in the CZ state is 10.
During the CZ state, control information regarding the CZ state is transmitted from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, and under the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, various effects and the number of remaining games during the CZ state are displayed on the main display 8.

・Transition process from CZ state to pseudo bonus state (arrow e in FIG. 6)
In the CZ state, a lottery process for transitioning to a pseudo bonus state is performed in each game.
The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is set according to the winning role of each game. The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is, for example, 50% when a rare role is won, 10% when a bell role or a replay role is won, and 5% when a miss occurs. The pseudo bonus state transition lottery is performed for each game in the CZ state, but whether or not there is a transition to the pseudo bonus state is determined in the final game of the CZ state, and when the transition to the pseudo bonus state is announced in the final game, the game state will transition to the pseudo bonus state in the same way as in the normal game state.
In addition, since the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed when each role is internally won, the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed even if the symbol corresponding to the winning role does not stop on reel 4 (when a miss occurs).

The winning probability of the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process for some or all of the winning roles may be other than the above. Also, while the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is performed when the bell role is won, the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process may be performed based on the winning of the symbol corresponding to the bell role.

During the CZ state, in order to increase interest in the game, a CZ effect in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8. In the CZ effect, for example, an effect image in which the main character prepares for a battle is displayed for the first few games (e.g., seven games), and an effect image in which the main character battles an enemy character is displayed as a series of effects spanning multiple games for the last few games (e.g., three games) of the CZ state. Then, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, the player is notified that the main character will win the final game and transition to the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, during the CZ state, the background during the preparation for the match and the offensive and defensive content during the match change according to the winning content of the game executed during that time, so as to change the sense of expectation for the transition to the pseudo bonus state. In addition, the number of remaining games in the CZ state is displayed on the main display 8, and the number of remaining games is subtracted each time a game is executed.
Furthermore, even during the preparation performance before the battle performance in the CZ performance, performance images in which the main character prepares for battle are executed continuously throughout each game, so that the preparation performance also becomes a series of performances that spans multiple games.

In addition, during the CZ state, it is also possible to notify whether or not there will be a transition to the CZ state without executing a battle effect. For example, if a pseudo bonus state is won in a specified game during the CZ state, an effect may be executed to notify that there will be a transition to the pseudo bonus state during that game. In this case, if the pseudo bonus state is not won in any game during the CZ state, the CZ state will end without an effect to notify that there will be a transition to the pseudo bonus state.

・Transition process from CZ state to normal gaming state (arrow d in FIG. 6)
In the CZ state, if the player does not win the lottery to enter the pseudo bonus state, the game will transition to the normal game state after a set number of games have been played in the CZ state. At this time, the CZ presentation will inform the player that the main character has been defeated and will not transition to the pseudo bonus state.

When transitioning from the CZ state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, speaker 9) under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined character from among multiple characters may be displayed on the main display device 8 or the sub-display device 17. The character to be displayed is selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, so that it is possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(pseudo bonus state)
The pseudo-bonus state as the second specific gaming state is a gaming state in which it is extremely easy to win medals, as both push order navigation for the push order bell role and color navigation for the color bell role are executed as notifications of operation modes advantageous to the player during the game in the pseudo-bonus state.
Also, as will be described in more detail later, the AT state differs from the pseudo bonus state in that color navigation for color bell roles is not executed, and only push order navigation for push order bell roles is executed, making the pseudo bonus state a gaming state in which it is easier to win medals than the AT state.

In addition, the pseudo bonus state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 18 to 20 games), and a lottery for transition to the AT state is held in a predetermined game executed during that period.
Therefore, if a player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state during a pseudo-bonus state in which a large number of medals can be won, the AT state will occur after the pseudo-bonus state ends, allowing the player to play a game to generate the next pseudo-bonus state while winning a certain number of medals, creating a synergistically advantageous state for the player.

The probability of winning the Push Order Bell role and the probability of winning the Color Bell role are values that increase the number of medals in a specified period if any one of the navigation states continues for a specified period, but it is preferable to set the probability of winning the Push Order Bell role (e.g., approximately 57%) to a higher value than the probability of winning the Color Bell role (e.g., approximately 30%).
In addition, the period during which the pseudo bonus state continues may be determined not only by the number of games executed, but also by the number of times either the push order navigation or the color navigation, or both, are executed, the number of medals paid out (number of medals paid out), the number of medals actually increased by the payment of medals (net increase in number of medals), etc.

In addition, in the first game that transitions to the pseudo bonus state, the period from when the start lever 3 is operated until when the stop button 5 is operated is extended by the control of the main control device 10 compared to a normal game, and during this period, the reel 4 is rotated in reverse, and then a specific symbol combination ("red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") is temporarily stopped on the reel 4 and then rotated forward again, a so-called reel effect is performed, and the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state is notified.

The reel presentation period during which the reel presentation is performed is set to, for example, 15 seconds, and during this period, operation of the stop button 5 is invalid, so that even if the reel 4 is operating, the game cannot progress.
Then, at the end of the reel presentation period, a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") will stop (automatically stop), so that the pseudo bonus state is a state in which navigation is executed in the same way as the AT state in terms of game content, but in appearance it appears as if a so-called big bonus state (real bonus state) has occurred, which is differentiated from the AT state.

Furthermore, when the reel presentation period ends, the reel 4 automatically starts rotating in the forward direction, and the operation of the stop button 5 becomes valid. From this point on, the stop operation of the first game that has transitioned to the pseudo bonus state becomes possible in the same way as in a normal game.
During the reel presentation, the sub-controller 20 controls the main display 8 to display an image corresponding to the reel presentation, which notifies the player of the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state.

・Transition process from pseudo bonus state to AT state (arrow f in FIG. 6)
In the pseudo bonus state, a lottery process for transition to the AT state is carried out in a predetermined number of games (1 to 3 games) executed at the end of the pseudo bonus state.
In this first embodiment, the lottery process for transitioning to the AT state is executed over a lottery game period that is set for at most the last three games of the pseudo bonus state, and whether or not to transition to the AT state is determined based on the result of the match lottery executed in each game during the lottery game period.
When all the results of the match lotteries in each game during the lottery game period are winning, it is determined that a special condition has been met, a transition to the AT state is decided, and the game state transitions to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends.

In other words, the main control unit 10 is capable of determining whether or not to transition to an AT state in relation to the execution of multiple games during a lottery game period, which is a predetermined period, and is configured to determine to grant a specified bonus when the lottery results related to the transition to the AT state in the multiple games satisfy predetermined special conditions.
In this first embodiment, the lottery process for transition to the AT state is performed in a predetermined number of games executed at the end of the pseudo-bonus state, but it is also possible to set up a period of a predetermined number of games after the pseudo-bonus state ends in which the lottery process for transition to the AT state is performed, and to play a game to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends.

In addition, the match lottery for each game executed during the lottery game period is executed separately from the lottery for the winning combination, and the lottery mode is set so that the probability of winning is not always constant but differs between each game.
For example, the probability of winning the match lottery for the first game during the lottery game period is 50%, for the second game it is 60%, and for the third game it is 70%.

In addition, the lottery mode may be a probabilistic mode other than those for each battle lottery described above, so long as the transition to the AT state occurs with a predetermined probability.
In addition, a plurality of selection patterns may be set, and one of the selection patterns may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
For example, a selection mode may be set in which the winning probability of the match lottery for each game is 50% for all three games during the lottery game period, and a selection mode in which the winning probability of the match lottery for each game is 25% for the first game, 50% for the second game, and 100% for the third game, and one of the selection modes may be switched. However, in this case, it is preferable that the total probability of transitioning from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state is the same regardless of the selection mode.

In addition, the selection mode may be changed based on the player's operation, allowing the player to select the selection mode according to his/her preference.
In addition, the total probability of transitioning from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state may be made changeable according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14 as a setting means.

The total probability of transitioning from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state may be set differently depending on the lottery mode. For example, the total probability of transitioning to the AT state may be switched from a low lottery mode to a high lottery mode based on a predetermined condition that occurs during the normal game state or the pseudo bonus state, such as the occurrence of a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role). In this case, if the AT state is won in a lottery mode with a low total probability, a bonus that is more advantageous to the player may be granted than if the AT state was won in a lottery mode with a high total probability. For example, if the AT state is won in a lottery mode with a low total probability, multiple continuation rights to the AT state may be stored (stocked), or an AT state with a greater number of continuations (higher AT state) may be generated.

In addition, during the lottery game period, in response to the execution of the game, a continuous presentation by characters is executed as a predetermined presentation on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-controller 20 as a presentation control means, based on the reception of control information from the main control unit 10.
The continuous effects during the pseudo bonus state have different content from the continuous effects executed during the aforementioned real premonition effect (or fake premonition effect), and are designed to complete the battle effect for each game.

In other words, in the continuous presentation executed during the main premonition presentation (or fake premonition presentation), the main character competes against the enemy character over three games, with the outcome of the battle being determined in the final game, whereas in the continuous presentation executed during the pseudo bonus state, the battle presentation is executed such that the outcome of the battle is determined for each game according to the battle lottery in each game.
In addition, the battle presentation in each game is executed based on the winning probability set for each game, so that the friendly characters (including the main character) who battle against the enemy characters in each game can appear in different types according to the winning probability.

For example, in the first game during a continuous performance, ally character A appears in response to a match lottery with a 50% chance of winning, in the second game, ally character B appears in response to a match lottery with a 60% chance of winning, and in the third game, ally character C (e.g., the main character) appears in response to a match lottery with a 70% chance of winning.

Then, if the match lottery in each game is won, the character on the friendly side that appears wins at the end of the game, and if the match lottery is not won, the character on the friendly side that appears loses at the end of the game. As a result, if the match lottery in all games is won, all the characters on the friendly side will win, and finally, the transition to the AT state will be notified.
On the other hand, if a player does not win even one match lottery during the lottery game period, the lottery game period ends at that point, and the pseudo bonus state also ends at that point. Therefore, the duration of the pseudo bonus state changes depending on the result of the match lottery.

In addition, in order to increase the interest of the game during the pseudo bonus state, during periods other than the lottery game period, a pseudo bonus effect in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17. In the pseudo bonus effect, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a specific piece of music is output from the speaker 9.

On the other hand, during the lottery game period in the pseudo bonus state, the background during the match presentation and the content of the offense and defense during the match presentation change according to each match presentation, thereby changing the sense of anticipation for the transition to the AT state.
Furthermore, the number of remaining games in the pseudo bonus state is displayed on the main display 8, and the number of remaining games is subtracted each time a game is executed.

In this first embodiment, the period for conducting the transition lottery for the AT state in the pseudo-bonus state is set to the last three games of the pseudo-bonus state, but it can be any period in which the transition lottery is conducted in a number of consecutive games, for example, four or five games.
In addition, the condition for transitioning to the AT state is set when all match lotteries in multiple games are won, but other conditions may also be used; for example, it may be decided to transition to the AT state by winning once or twice.

In addition, if there is a loss in even one match lottery during the lottery game period, the lottery game period (pseudo bonus state) ends at that point, but it is also possible to execute all three games during the lottery game period regardless of the lottery results for each game. In this case, if there is a loss in the match lotteries for all games, a transition to the AT state may be made as a special bonus. However, in this case, the condition is that a game that has a 100% chance of winning the match lottery is not executed.

In addition, the lottery for transition to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state may be executed outside the lottery game period described above. For example, when reel 4 is stopped in a normal operation mode (e.g., an operation mode in which the left reel 4a is stopped first), a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role stops, but when reel 4 is stopped in an irregular operation mode different from the normal operation mode (e.g., an operation mode in which the right reel 4c is stopped first), a specific replay role in which a specific symbol combination (e.g., "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") stops can be drawn, and when a specific replay role is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo bonus state, a transition to the AT state may be made unconditionally (with a 100% probability).
In this case, when a specific replay combination is won, it is preferable to display on the main display 8 an image encouraging the player to perform an irregular operation mode and to aim for a specific symbol combination.

In addition, if a rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo bonus state, the right to transition to the AT state at that time may be granted with a predetermined probability (e.g., 10%).
In addition, when a rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo bonus state, rather than granting the right to transition to the AT state, it is also possible to grant the right to win a match lottery for a specified number of games (one or two games) during the lottery game period with a specified probability (e.g., 20%) at that time.
In this case, when a rare combination is won, it is preferable to execute a winning effect on the main display 8 that is completed in one game.

In addition, if the right to transition to the AT state is granted when a rare role is won during a period other than the lottery game period in the pseudo bonus state, it is preferable to carry out a continuous performance in which the player wins all games during the lottery game period regardless of the outcome of the match lottery.
In addition, during the lottery game period, a draw lottery may be held separately from the match lottery, and if the match lottery is not won but the draw lottery is won, the match lottery for that round may be invalidated and a game in which a new match lottery is held may be additionally held during the lottery game period.
In addition, if all the match lotteries during the lottery game period are won, the lottery game period may be extended so that the lottery game period does not end until a match lottery is not won. In this case, if a match lottery for the extended game is won, the right to continue the AT state may be granted each time.

In addition, a button effect may be executed during the match effect of each game during the lottery game period in the pseudo bonus state.
The button presentation as an operation presentation is a series of presentations in which first, on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17), an operation image consisting of an image imitating an operation button that prompts the operation of the presentation button 2d, or text information instructing an operation (e.g., "PUSH"), etc. is displayed, and then, when the indicated presentation button 2d (or upper presentation button 2f) is operated, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display 8 (or sub-display 17).For example, at the end of a game in which a match presentation is executed, an image imitating an operation button or an operation image is displayed, and then, when the indicated presentation button 2d is operated, an image notifying the result of a predetermined match-up lottery is displayed on the main display 8.
In this case, it is preferable that if the result of the match lottery is a win, the probability of the button effect being executed is higher than if the result is a non-win.

-Transition process from pseudo bonus state to normal game state (arrow b in FIG. 6)
In the pseudo bonus state, if the special condition is not met and the right to transition to the AT state is not granted, that is, if all the match lotteries for each game during the lottery game period in the pseudo bonus state are not won, the game transitions to the normal game state after the pseudo bonus state ends.
In this first embodiment, if the match lottery is not won even once in a game during the lottery game period, the non-fulfillment of the special condition is confirmed, and therefore, when the match lottery is not won in any game during the lottery game period, the termination condition for the pseudo-bonus state is fulfilled, and the game state transitions to the normal game state from the next game.

Therefore, the duration of the pseudo bonus state will change depending on the result of the game match lottery during the lottery game period.
For example, if the match lottery for the 18th game, which is the first game during the lottery game period, is not won, the duration of the pseudo bonus state will be 18 games, but if the first game to be not won is the 20th game, which is the last game, the duration will be 20 games.
In addition, since push order navigation and color navigation are performed during the lottery game period, even if the special conditions are not met in the pseudo bonus state, the longer the lottery game period continues without the match lottery being a non-winning one, the more opportunities there are to win medals, which makes the player more advantageous.
It is possible to execute push order navigation for push order bell roles and color navigation for color bell roles even in games during the lottery game period, but push order navigation or color navigation may not be performed in games during the lottery game period, or push order navigation or color navigation may be performed only with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

When transitioning from the pseudo bonus state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined character from among multiple characters may be displayed on the main display device 8 or the sub-display device 17, and the displayed character may be selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is continuously performed during the period in which the game is in the AT state to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.
However, unlike the pseudo bonus state, during the AT state, color navigation for the color bell role is not executed, and only push order navigation is executed, so the amount of medals won is less than during the pseudo bonus state.

During the AT state, a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) granted at the time of the initial transition to the AT state is managed as the remaining number of games that can continue the AT state, and the remaining number of games is subtracted for each game, and the AT state continues until there are no remaining games.
When there are no more games remaining in the AT state, the AT state ends.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is sent from the main control device 10 to the sub-control device 20, and under the control of the sub-control device 20, images of various effects during the AT state are displayed on the main display device 8. In addition, the number of games remaining during the AT state, the total number of medals won during a series of AT states, and the total number of games played during the AT state are displayed on the main display device 8.

In addition, in the AT state, a lottery process for continuing the AT state is performed in a predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) executed at the end of the AT state.
In this first embodiment, the lottery process for continuing the AT state is executed over a lottery game period that is set for at most the last three games of the AT state, and whether or not to continue the AT state is determined based on the result of the match lottery executed in each game during the lottery game period.
When the result of the match lottery in each game during the lottery game period is a win twice, it is judged that a special condition is established, the continuation of the AT state is decided, and a new AT state starts after the end of the ongoing AT state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 is capable of deciding whether or not to grant a specified bonus (continuation of the AT state) in connection with the execution of multiple games during a lottery game period, which serves as a specified period, and is configured to decide to grant the specified bonus when the lottery results regarding the granting of the specified bonus in multiple games satisfy predetermined special conditions.

In addition, in the new AT state, the continuation of the AT state itself is managed in the same manner as during the initial transition to the AT state, and the AT state ends when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) have been played; however, in the predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) played at the end of this new AT state, a lottery process for the continuation of the AT state is performed in the same manner as during the initial transition.
Therefore, the AT state is repeatedly executed by the establishment of special conditions in the continuation lottery process during each AT state.

In addition, the winning probability of the match lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period in the AT state is set to be not always constant, similar to that during the pseudo bonus state.
The winning probability of each match lottery during the lottery game period in the AT state may be the same as that during the pseudo bonus state, or may be different. In addition, a plurality of lottery modes for the lottery game period in the AT state may be set and may be changeable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, or may be changeable based on the player's operation, allowing the player to select according to his/her preference.

Also, similar to the pseudo bonus state, during the lottery game period in the AT state, continuous character presentations are executed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main control unit 10 in response to the execution of the game.
As with the pseudo bonus state, the continuous performances during the AT state are also designed so that the battle performance is completed for each game, and the battle performance is executed based on the winning probability set for each game, and the friendly characters (including the main character) who compete against the enemy characters for each game appear in different types corresponding to the winning probability.

If the match lottery for each game is won, the friendly character that appears wins at the end of the game, and if the match lottery is not won, the friendly character that appears loses at the end of the game, and this presentation is carried out in a complete manner for each game.
However, in the continuation lottery process during the AT state, some of the conditions are set differently from the transition lottery process during the pseudo-bonus state. In the pseudo-bonus state, transition to the AT state is confirmed if all the results of the match lotteries in three games are wins, whereas in the AT state, continuation of the next AT state is confirmed if two of the results of the match lotteries in three games are wins.

Therefore, the conditions for continuing the AT state are less difficult than the transition conditions, which are the conditions for entering the AT state. For example, if the match lotteries for the first and second games are won, the continuation of the next AT state is confirmed at that point. Even if the match lottery for the third game is not won, after the match performance for that game is determined to be a loss, the continuation of the AT state will finally be announced and a transition will occur to a new AT state.

In addition, in this first embodiment, if all the results of the match lotteries in each game executed during the lottery game period during the AT state are winning, in addition to being granted the right to continue the AT state for the next time, the right to continue the AT state for the time after that is also granted.
In other words, if two winning results are derived in the match lottery during the lottery game period during the AT state, a specific benefit will be awarded and the right to continue the next AT state will be granted, but if three winning results are derived, in addition to the grant of the specific benefit, the right to continue will be stored (stored) so that the AT state will continue for the next AT state as well, as a different benefit.

In addition, if the right to continue the AT state is stored (stocked), the AT state will continue unconditionally, so in the next game during the lottery game period during the AT state, it is preferable to execute a presentation image on the main display 8 that can notify the player that the state will continue, without performing the battle presentation described above.

Furthermore, even if the right to continue the AT state is stored (in storage), rather than unconditionally confirming the AT state, a normal continuation lottery process may be performed in the next AT state, and the AT state may be continued using the stored information of the right to continue the AT state only if the special condition is not met.
Therefore, in this case, a match lottery is also held for the game during the lottery game period during the next AT state, and if special conditions are met at this time, the AT state will continue without using the stored information on the right to continue the AT state, with its use reserved for the next time onwards.
Furthermore, the main control unit 10 may be able to store and hold (stock) multiple continuation rights for the AT state that are granted by deriving three winning results, so that, for example, when three winning results are derived in succession, two continuation rights may be able to be additionally stored.
In this case, when the AT state is continued using the stored information of the right to continue the AT state, the stored information of the right to continue is subtracted each time.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game during periods other than the lottery game period during the AT state, the AT state performance in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17. In the AT state performance, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a specific piece of music is output from the speaker 9.

On the other hand, during the lottery game period in the AT state, the background during the battle presentation and the content of the offense and defense during the battle presentation change depending on the type of battle lottery, changing the sense of expectation for the continuation of the AT state.

In this first embodiment, the period during which the AT state continuation lottery is conducted in the AT state is set to the last three games of the AT state, but it can be any period during which the transition lottery is conducted in a number of consecutive games, for example, four or five games.
In addition, the special condition for the continuation of the AT state is set when the match lottery in multiple games is won twice, but other conditions may also be used; for example, it may be determined that the AT state will continue when the match lottery is won once or three times.
In addition, if there is a loss in the match lottery even once during the lottery game period, the lottery game period (AT state) is ended at that point, but it is also possible to execute all three games during the lottery game period regardless of the lottery results of each game. In this case, if there is a loss in the match lottery for all games, it is also possible to continue to the next AT state as a special privilege. However, in this case, the condition is that a game that has a 100% probability of winning the match lottery is not executed.

In addition, during the AT state, the lottery for the next AT state continuation may be performed outside the lottery game period described above. For example, similar to during the pseudo bonus state, if a specific replay role is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the AT state, the AT state may be continued unconditionally (100% probability).

In addition, if a rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the AT state, the right to continue the AT state at that time may be granted with a predetermined probability (e.g., 10%).
In addition, when a rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the AT state, instead of granting the right to continue in the AT state, the right to win a match lottery for a specified number of games (1 to 3 games) during the lottery game period may be granted at that time with a specified probability (e.g., 20%).
In this case, when a rare combination is won, it is preferable to execute a winning effect on the main display 8 that is completed in one game.
Also, similarly to during the pseudo bonus state, a button effect may be executed during the match effect of each game during the lottery game period in the AT state.

In addition, if a specified rare role (for example, a weak cherry role, a weak watermelon role, a strong watermelon role, or a strong cherry role) is won during the AT state, a lottery may be held to add to the number of games played in the AT state, and if the lottery for adding the number of games is won, a predetermined number of games corresponding to the rare role that triggered the win may be added to the number of remaining games in the currently active AT state.

In addition, if a specific rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won during the AT state, in addition to the above-mentioned additional lottery, it may be possible to generate an additional specialized zone in which the probability of the number of games being added for a specific period (e.g., 10 games) is higher than in other states.
The add-on specialization zone occurs with a specified probability (e.g., 10%) when a specific rare role (e.g., a strong cherry role) is won, and during the add-on specialization zone, in addition to rare roles with a low probability of winning, for example, all roles other than replay roles are used as trigger roles for adding on, increasing the possibility of a large number of games being awarded (added on) as a specified bonus.

In addition, in the add-on specialization zone, the right to continue the AT state may be granted (stocked) at a predetermined probability (for example, 15%) when a predetermined role (for example, a rare role) is won. In addition, the right to continue the AT state may be granted (stocked) multiple times each time the above conditions are met.
In this case, if the number of rights (stock number) remaining to continue the AT state is met, the special condition will be met unconditionally in the continuation lottery process during the AT state.

In addition, if three winning results are derived in the match lottery during the lottery game period during the AT state, in addition to the grant of a specified bonus, a continuation right is stored (stocked) so that the AT state will continue for the next AT state as well, as a grant of another bonus. As a grant of another bonus, a specified number of games (for example, 20) may be added to the number of remaining games in the AT state currently being executed or the next AT state, or as a grant of another bonus, the aforementioned added special zone may be executed after the end of the AT state currently being executed.

In addition, during the lottery game period in the AT state, a draw lottery may be executed separately from the match lottery, and if the match lottery is not won but the draw lottery is won, the match lottery for that round may be invalidated and a game for a new match lottery may be additionally executed during the lottery game period.
In addition, if all the match lotteries during the lottery game period are won, the lottery game period may be extended so that the lottery game period does not end until a match lottery is not won. In this case, if a match lottery for the extended game is won, the right to continue the AT state may be granted each time.

-Transition process from AT state to pseudo bonus state (arrow i in FIG. 6)
During the AT state, as during the normal game state, the main control unit 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state in advance based on the winning of a specified rare role as a specific lottery result, and the transition process to the pseudo bonus state is performed with a specified probability (e.g., 20%) when a chance role or a strong cherry role is won, for example.

If the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is reserved when transitioning to the pseudo bonus state, and when returning to the AT state, the AT state is resumed based on the reserved number of remaining games.
Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus state is entered during the AT state, the pseudo-bonus state will be executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 20 games) as described above, and the navigation state will change from a state in which only push order navigation is executed to a state in which both push order navigation and color navigation are executed, resulting in an increase in the number of medals acquired.

However, if the pseudo bonus state is entered during an AT state, unlike when the pseudo bonus state is entered during normal play, the lottery process for entering the AT state is not performed, and the pseudo bonus state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played, and the state returns to the AT state.

In addition, even if a transition occurs to a pseudo bonus state during an AT state, a continuation lottery period similar to that described above may be set and lottery processing for the AT state may be performed to increase the right to continue the AT state.
Also, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the pseudo bonus state during the AT state, the pseudo bonus state may not be transitioned to immediately, but rather a battle presentation (a battle presentation in which the protagonist wins) may be executed as described above for a predetermined period of time (e.g., three games) before transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, even if a specified rare role is won during the AT state but the transition lottery to the pseudo bonus state is not won, a battle effect (a battle effect in which the protagonist is defeated) may be executed.

Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow h in FIG. 6)
In the AT state, if no special conditions are met and the right to continue to the next AT state is not granted, that is, if two winning results are not derived in the match lottery for each game during the lottery game period in the AT state, the game transitions to the normal game state after the AT state ends.
In this first embodiment, if a non-winning result in the match lottery is derived twice in a game during the lottery game period, the non-establishment of the special condition is confirmed, so when a non-winning result in the match lottery is derived twice in any game during the lottery game period, the condition for terminating the AT state is established, and the game state transitions to the normal game state from the next game.

Therefore, the duration of the currently executed AT state will change depending on the result of the game match lottery during the lottery game period.
For example, if the match lottery for the 28th game, which is the first game during the lottery game period, is not won, and then the match lottery for the 29th game, which is the second game, is also not won, the duration of the AT state will be 29 games, but if the match lottery for the second game is won and the 30th game, which is the last game, is not won, the duration will be 30 games.

In addition, since push order navigation is performed during the lottery game period, even if the special conditions are not met in the continuation lottery process in the AT state, the longer the lottery game period continues without two non-winning matches, the more opportunities there are to win medals, which makes the player more advantageous.
It should be noted that push order navigation for the push order bell role is performed even in games during the lottery game period, but push order navigation may not be performed in games during the lottery game period, or push order navigation may be performed only with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

When the AT state is changed to the normal game state, the winning probability state of the pseudo bonus state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the winning probability state may be changed to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that restriction control will be performed by the aforementioned restriction means during the high probability state, but if restriction control is performed during the high probability state, a transition will be made to the normal probability state.

In addition, at the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), and during the ending state (ending period), the game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the ending state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the ending state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the gaming state is transitioned in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

[Game state transition and display contents on the main display in the first embodiment]
Next, referring to the timing chart of Figure 7, the transition of the game state realized by the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the display contents on the main display unit 8 will be described, in particular, the transition of the game state when the game state changes in the order of normal game state → pseudo bonus state → AT state, and the display contents on the main display unit 8.
FIG. 7 shows the corresponding relationship between the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state, and the transition from the pseudo bonus state to the AT state, and the change in the display content on the main display 8 during that time.
Specifically, under the control of the main control device 10, a transition to a pseudo bonus state is determined with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%) when a predetermined role (e.g., a chance role) is won in the normal game state, and then as the game progresses, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the pseudo bonus state, and further, when a transition lottery for the AT state during the pseudo bonus state is won and the transition to the AT state is made, the navigation state and presentation content (presentation image) displayed on the main display 8 are shown.
Note that FIG. 7 shows the period following the continuous presentation executed at the final stage of this premonition presentation during the normal gaming state, and omits the period preceding that.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 10 controls the drawing of various bonuses and changes to various game states (including the time of change), and control information related to this control is transmitted from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, which then controls the various corresponding displays.
The start time and duration of effects that are not directly related to changes in the game state (for example, fake premonition effects, etc.) may be controlled by the sub-controller 20 based on control information received from the main controller 10, or may be controlled independently by the sub-controller 20 without receiving control information from the main controller 10. However, it is necessary to receive control information that triggers the effects (for example, information on winning a rare role, etc.).

First, as shown in FIG. 7, during normal game mode when a transition to the pseudo bonus state has not been decided, if a chance role is won and the pseudo bonus state is won, the premonition effect will be executed as described above, and in the final game of the consecutive effects (the second game shown in the figure) executed at the final stage of the premonition effect, an image of the main character winning and an image announcing the transition to the pseudo bonus state will be displayed on the main display 8.
During normal game play, push order navigation and color navigation on the main display 8 are not executed.

Then, from the start of the third game (timing t0), the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state.
When the game state transitions to a pseudo bonus state, the sub-controller 20 activates the push order navigation control and the color navigation control based on the control information from the main control unit 10, and if any of the push order bell roles is won, the sub-controller 20 executes the push order navigation corresponding to that role, and if any of the color bell roles is won, the sub-controller 20 controls to a state where the color navigation corresponding to that role is executed.
Therefore, during the pseudo bonus state, both push order navigation and color navigation are executed, making it extremely easy to win medals.
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, the main control device 10 continues to output, via the external output terminal 18, information informing the management device that the gaming state has transitioned to the pseudo bonus state.

Then, when the game proceeds to the 20th game, the AT state transition lottery period begins as described above, and the main display 8 will execute a continuous presentation (battle presentation) to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
Figure 7 illustrates an example of a transition to the AT state, whereby if all transition lotteries for the 20th game (timing t1), the 21st game (timing t2), and the 22nd game (timing t3) are won, a presentation image will be displayed on the main display 8 to notify the player that the game will transition to the AT state at the end of the 22nd game.

Then, from the start of the 23rd game (timing t4), the gaming state transitions to the AT state, and the main display 8 displays an effect image for the AT state.
In addition, when the game state transitions to the AT state, based on the control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20 activates only the control of the push order navigation out of the push order navigation and color navigation, and if any of the push order bell roles is won, it will control the state to execute the push order navigation corresponding to that role.

Therefore, the control of the Color Navi that was activated during the pseudo bonus state is deactivated upon transition to the AT state, and even if one of the color bell roles is won, the Color Navi corresponding to that role will no longer be executed. While it is easy to win medals during the AT state, the number of medals won will be smaller than during the pseudo bonus state because the Color Navi is not executed.
However, since a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is held even during a game in the AT state, the transition to the AT state allows a player to win a certain number of medals and a lottery for transition to the next pseudo-bonus state is held, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, when the gaming state transitions to the AT state, the main control device 10 continues to output, via the external output terminal 18, information informing the management device side that the gaming state has transitioned to the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when a pseudo bonus state occurs, both the push order navigation and the color navigation are executed during the pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 constitutes a second specific game state control means capable of generating a pseudo-bonus state as a second specific game state that is advantageous to the player by executing (activating) the push order navigation and color navigation by the sub-control unit 20 as the first stop operation notification means and the second stop operation notification means.

Therefore, the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state allows the player to win a large number of medals, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, while the execution of Color Navigation in particular makes it possible to win more medals during the pseudo bonus state, it also forces the player to perform relatively laborious operations, such as eye-pressing operations aimed at special symbols. However, since the pseudo bonus state has a more limited duration than the AT state, it is possible for the player to win more medals in a short period of time that does not cause dissatisfaction to the player.

In addition, when an AT state occurs, only the push order navigation is executed during the AT state, allowing the player to win a large number of medals, although fewer than during the pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 constitutes a first specific game state control means that can generate an AT state as a first specific game state that is advantageous to the player by executing (activating) the push order navigation by the sub-control unit 20 as the first stop operation notification means.

Therefore, the occurrence of the AT state allows the player to win a large number of medals, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, since push order navigation requires less effort from the player than color navigation, even if the AT state continues for a long time, the player can win medals without feeling dissatisfied.

In addition, during the pseudo bonus state, a lottery process for transition to the AT state is executed, and if the AT state transition lottery at that time is won, the AT state will occur after the pseudo bonus state ends.
In other words, the main control device 10 constitutes a first specific gaming state lottery means capable of conducting a lottery to generate an AT state as a first specific gaming state in a game during a pseudo bonus state as a second specific gaming state.
Therefore, when the pseudo bonus state occurs, it is possible to not only win a large number of medals, but also to increase the expectation of the occurrence of the AT state.
Furthermore, if the player wins the AT state lottery, he or she will receive a certain number of medals and will also have increased anticipation for the next occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state, thereby synergistically increasing the player's anticipation.

In addition, during the pseudo bonus state, for example, a continuous presentation corresponding to a lottery for transition to the AT state will be executed.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 constitutes an effect control means capable of executing a continuous effect as a predetermined effect in a game during a pseudo bonus state as the second specific gaming state.
Therefore, during the pseudo bonus state, a presentation for the transition to the AT state is executed, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The push order navigation may be any type that enables the player to recognize the order in which to push the reels 4 to achieve the winning push order bell role, and similarly, the color navigation may be any type that enables the player to recognize the type of color bell role that has been won and the type of reel 4 that should be pressed, and in addition to the image on the main display 8, the sub-display 17, a specified light-emitting means, and speaker 9 may be used to notify the player.
In addition, both push order navigation and color navigation are executed during the pseudo bonus state, and only push order navigation is executed during the AT state, but the manner in which which navigation is activated may be other than the above. For example, only color navigation may be executed during the pseudo bonus state and only push order navigation may be executed during the AT state, or both push order navigation and color navigation may be executed during the AT state and only push order navigation may be executed during the pseudo bonus state.

Furthermore, the main control device 10 may be provided with a function for generating multiple types of pseudo bonus states.
For example, it may be possible to generate a first pseudo-bonus state that lasts for a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) and a second pseudo-bonus state that lasts for a number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games), and either pseudo-bonus state may be selectively generated based on the result of a lottery such as a random number.

In addition, a first pseudo-bonus state in which only the push order navigation is activated and a second pseudo-bonus state in which both the push order navigation and the color navigation are activated may be selectively generated in the same manner as described above.
Furthermore, the AT state transition lottery may be performed so that the probability of transitioning to the AT state differs between the first pseudo bonus state in which only the push order navigation is activated and the second pseudo bonus state in which both the push order navigation and the color navigation are activated. For example, the probability of transitioning to the AT state is made higher when the second pseudo bonus state occurs than when the first pseudo bonus state occurs.
In this way, a pseudo-bonus state is created in which the player has different expectations regarding the amount of medals won and the transition to the AT state, making it possible to further increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, when providing a limiter function in the advantageous zone described above, the sub-controller 20 may be provided with an ending presentation control means that determines in advance that the limiter will be reached during the AT state, and executes a predetermined ending presentation on the main display 8 based on the results of that advance determination.
The ending presentation is different from the presentation image during the normal AT state in that it displays a presentation image that is executed only when a limiter is reached, and is a presentation that enhances the player's sense of accomplishment.

At this time, it is preferable that the advance judgment of the limiter based on the number of medals won is made based on the number of medals that can be won by winning the push order bell role. For example, it is preferable to execute an advance judgment of the limiter (determine the start of the ending performance) when the number of medals that can be won if the push order bell is won in all remaining games among the number of remaining games in the AT state reaches the limiter value.
This is because there is a possibility of a pseudo-bonus state in which Color Navi is executed during the AT state, and if a pre-determination is made taking into account the number of medals that can be won by winning the Color Bell role, then if the pseudo-bonus state does not occur afterwards, a situation may occur in which the limiter is not reached even though the ending performance is executed; however, this is to prevent such a situation from occurring.

Therefore, when an ending performance is executed, it is possible to reliably reach the limiter, and because a pre-determination is made based on the push order bell role, which has a relatively low number of medals acquired, it is possible to extend the period during which the ending performance is executed, further enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

In addition, in a game in which any navigation is executed during the AT state or pseudo bonus state in which an ending performance is being executed, if a stop operation mode different from the executed navigation is performed (if a winning prize is missed), setting-related information (setting suggestion information) capable of suggesting the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, sub display 17, speaker 9), as at the end of the pseudo bonus state described above.
In this way, when an ending performance is performed, it is possible to provide the player with another benefit, such as providing useful information, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.
In this case, the number of times the setting-related information is notified may be limited to only one time, or the setting-related information may be notified when a player misses out on a winning prize multiple times (e.g., three times).

In addition, when a colored bell role is won, the stop buttons 5a to 5c can be operated in one of four different push orders (such as "5b → 5a → 5c" or "5c → 5b → 5a") (a special push order) other than the push order that stops the left reel 4a first, causing a specified symbol combination (such as "Replay, Bell A, Bell A") to stop on the middle pay line, and a specified number of medals (such as three) can be paid out when this symbol combination stops.

For example, three medals may be paid out in each of the following cases: when color bell role 1, which has the winning symbol combination of "Blank, Bell A, Bell A," is pressed in the order of "5b → 5a → 5c," when color bell role 2, which has the winning symbol combination of "BAR, Bell A, Bell A," is pressed in the order of "5b → 5c → 5a," when color bell role 3, which has the winning symbol combination of "Red 7A, Bell A, Bell A," is pressed in the order of "5c → 5a → 5b," and when color bell role 4, which has the winning symbol combination of "White 7, Bell A, Bell A," is pressed in the order of "5c → 5b → 5a."

Furthermore, if any of the colored bell roles is won during the AT state, the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 may execute a special push order navigation that navigates a special push order in which three medals are paid out.
In this way, even if the color bell role is won during the AT state when the color navigation is not executed, the special push order navigation will be executed and the player will be able to win enough medals to maintain his/her current medal holdings, thereby preventing the player from winning a small number of medals due to frequent wins of the color bell role during the AT state.
It is also possible to prevent the formation of a color bell role (15 coin role), which requires the left reel 4a to stop first, so that it is possible to prevent the amount of medals won during the AT state from becoming extremely large and to stabilize the amount of medals won.

In addition, in the above case, it is preferable to execute the display mode of the special push order navigation during the AT state in the same manner as the push order navigation. In this way, even if the special push order navigation is executed during the AT state, when the push order navigation is mainly executed, the navigation can be executed without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, during the pseudo bonus state, both push order navigation and color navigation are executed, but it is also possible to execute both push order navigation and color navigation until a predetermined number of games have been played during the pseudo bonus state, and then execute only push order navigation in subsequent games.
In addition, when the pseudo bonus state is executed, the number of games in which both push order navigation and color navigation are executed and the number of games in which only push order navigation is executed may be determined, so that the number of games in which the navigation mode changes may be different.

In addition, at the start of a specific game state in which only one navigation is executed, the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 may be provided with a rescue means for specially executing one navigation until the other navigation is executed for the first time.
For example, when an AT state in which only push order navigation is executed is started, if a color navigation role is won in the game up until the first time that push order navigation is executed, color navigation is executed.
In this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, even though a specific game state has occurred, the player is unable to obtain medals initially, and ends up with no medals in hand, forcing the player to re-lend medals.

In addition, the display manner of the push order navigation and the color navigation executed on the main display 8 may be clearly different.
For example, when push order navigation is executed, an image showing the push order may be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8, while when color navigation is executed, an image showing a special pattern may be displayed approximately in the center of the screen of the main display 8.When push order navigation is executed, an image of a predetermined size showing the push order may be displayed in a predetermined part of the screen of the main display 8, while when color navigation is executed, an image showing a special pattern larger than the image showing the push order may be displayed in a predetermined part of the screen of the main display 8.
In this way, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the player, and in particular, it is possible to prevent operational errors by the player even during the pseudo bonus state, where operational errors are more likely to occur due to the mixture of push order navigation and color navigation.

In addition, in a specified game during the AT state, if any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, a so-called push order guessing game may be executed in which the player is allowed to select the push order at that time without executing the push order navigation.
In this case, in the push order guessing game, if the push order corresponding to the winning push order bell role is operated, a specified number of games (e.g., 10 games) may be added as a specified bonus.

Also, in a specified game in which a push order bell role or a color bell role is won during a pseudo bonus state, a game may be run in which the player is allowed to select the winning bell role without executing navigation, and a specified bonus may be awarded if the winning bell role is won.
In this case, the player does not know whether he or she will win the push order bell role or the color bell role, which gives the player more options and thus increases the fun factor.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a transition to the pseudo bonus state is notified, the next game will immediately transition to the pseudo bonus state. However, after a transition to the pseudo bonus state is notified, a transition to the pseudo bonus state may be triggered by the winning of a replay role that can stop a specified symbol combination (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") when a reel 4 other than the left reel 4a is stopped as a specified role.

In this case, after the transition to the pseudo bonus state is announced, there is a possibility that the player's medals will decrease during the preparation period until the specified role is won, so a compensation function may be provided to suppress the decrease in medals.
For example, if only the stopping order of the first reel 4 is correct in the push order bell role and the player misses out on winning the push order bell role, push order navigation may be performed to make it easier to win medals in the next game, or navigation may be limited to the next game in which the so-called single bonus stops.
In this way, it is possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied.
The slot machine 1 in the first embodiment is configured as described above.

[Modification 1 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the duration of the pseudo bonus state is determined by a preset number of games (e.g., 20 games), but in variant 1 of the first embodiment, the duration of the pseudo bonus state is determined by the number of times the color navigation is executed.
Therefore, only the provision regarding the duration of the pseudo bonus state differs from the first embodiment described above, and the other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above.

In other words, when the pseudo bonus state occurs, the main control unit 10 determines in advance the upper limit of the number of times that the color navigation will be executed, which will end the pseudo bonus state, and ends the pseudo bonus state when the actual color navigation has been executed the maximum number of times that the color navigation has been executed.
Therefore, the duration of the pseudo bonus state will change depending on the winning status of the randomly selected color bell role.
In addition, since the number of times the push order navigation is executed is unrelated to the duration of the pseudo bonus state, if the number of times the color navigation is executed does not reach the upper limit and the duration of the pseudo bonus state is extended, the likelihood that the push order navigation will be executed during that time increases, and the period during which medals can be earned will be extended accordingly.

In addition, the main control unit 10 determines the upper limit number of times the color navigation is activated during the pseudo bonus state from among a number of preset upper limits (5 times, 10 times, 15 times) when the pseudo bonus state occurs, and changes the duration of the pseudo bonus state depending on the determined upper limit number.
The upper limit number of times for the color navigation may be determined in any manner, but for example, the upper limit number may be determined based on a drawing of a predetermined random number when a lottery for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is won, or the upper limit number may be determined based on a drawing of a predetermined random number when the first game is executed to start the pseudo bonus state. Also, the determination of the upper limit number of times for the color navigation may be changed depending on the setting value of the probability setting device 14.

FIG. 8 shows effect images on the main display 8 at the start of the first game in which the pseudo bonus state begins, during the game, and after the game ends.
As described above, the main control unit 10 determines the maximum number of times that color navigation can be performed when a pseudo-bonus state occurs, and the sub-control unit 20, which acts as a presentation control means, executes a selection presentation on the main display unit 8 as a predetermined presentation corresponding to the determination of the maximum number of times that color navigation can be performed, based on control information from the main control unit 10.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the first game in the pseudo bonus state is started, a first color navigation selection image 31a containing text information "Color Navigation x 5", corresponding to a maximum number of times that Color Navigation can be played of 5, a second color navigation selection image 31b containing text information "Color Navigation x 10", corresponding to a maximum number of times that Color Navigation can be played of 10, and a third color navigation selection image 31c containing text information "Color Navigation x 15", corresponding to a maximum number of times that Color Navigation can be played of 15, are displayed in a roughly triangular arrangement in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.

In addition, a game content image 30 consisting of text information of "Color Navi Acquisition Game" is displayed at the top of the screen of the main display 8, notifying the player that the maximum number of selection effects for the Color Navi will be executed.
Also, although not shown in the figures, if any of the bell roles is won in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, the corresponding navigation will be displayed on the main display 8 in parallel with the selection performance.
In addition, in the first game of the pseudo bonus state, any navigation may not be executed so as not to impair the visibility of the selection presentation.

During the execution of the first game, the frame surrounding each selected image moves in sequence while emitting light at high speed, and at the end of the game, the high speed movement of the frame surrounding the selected image stops at the position of the selected image corresponding to the maximum number of times color navigation can be performed, which has been determined in advance by the main control unit 10, and the result of the determination of the maximum number of times color navigation can be performed is announced.
In addition, in FIG. 8, a case is illustrated in which the upper limit number of times for color navigation is determined to be 10, so the high-speed light emitting movement of the surrounding frame stops at the position of the second color navigation selection image 31b.

FIG. 8(b) shows the presentation image on the main display 8 at the time when the first game in the pseudo bonus state ends.
As shown in Figure 8 (b), if the maximum number of times color navigation is set to 10, after the high-speed light-emitting movement of the enclosing frame stops, only the second color navigation selection image 31b is displayed in approximately the center of the screen, and the maximum number of times color navigation is currently performed is notified.
Then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the first game, a result notification image 32 containing the text information "Game result, color navigation: 10" is displayed approximately in the center of the screen of the main display 8, as shown in Figure 8 (c), thereby notifying in detail that the maximum number of times the color navigation can be performed this time is 10.

When the next game is started in this state, the result notification image 32 will be erased and the pseudo bonus state presentation images and various navigations will be executed, and the remaining number of times the determined color navigation is performed will be displayed in a specified part of the screen.

As described above, in variant example 1 of the first embodiment, when a pseudo-bonus state occurs, the upper limit of the number of color navigations that can be executed during that pseudo-bonus state is determined, and the pseudo-bonus state continues for that number of times.
In other words, when the main control unit 10 as the second specific game state control means generates a pseudo-bonus state as the second specific game state, the main control unit 10 as the second stop operation notification means can determine the upper limit number of times that the color navigation (second stop operation mode) is notified, and when a game that reaches the upper limit number of times is played in the pseudo-bonus state, the pseudo-bonus state can be ended.
Therefore, the number of games that the pseudo bonus state can continue is not fixed but changes in various ways, and a variety of pseudo bonus state execution modes are created, making it possible to generate highly interesting pseudo bonus states.

In addition, the duration of the pseudo bonus state is determined only by the number of times the color navigation is executed; the number of times the push order navigation is executed does not affect the duration. Therefore, if the game progresses during the pseudo bonus state without the number of times the color navigation is executed increasing, there is a possibility that the push order navigation will be executed during that time, which will increase the number of medals won during the pseudo bonus state. This makes it possible to play a highly entertaining game that changes the number of medals won depending on how the navigation is executed, and thus changes the player's expectations.

In addition, the sub-control device 20, which serves as a presentation control means, is adapted to execute a selection presentation as a predetermined presentation during a game in the pseudo-bonus state, which is the second specific gaming state, thereby making it possible to increase interest during the pseudo-bonus state.
The duration of the pseudo bonus state may be determined solely by the number of times the push order navigation is performed.
As described above, the first modification of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the First Embodiment]
Next, a second modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the duration of the AT state is determined by a preset number of games (e.g., 30 games), but in variant example 2 of the first embodiment, the duration of the AT state is determined by the number of medals (net increase in number of medals) acquired by the player during the AT state.

Furthermore, in variant 2 of the first embodiment, the navigation state is also different from that of the first embodiment described above, and the main control device 10 is capable of generating a type 1 navigation state in which only push order navigation is executed (activated) during the AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, and a type 2 navigation state in which both push order navigation and color navigation are executed (activated) during the AT state, with the other configurations being the same as those of the first embodiment described above.

Therefore, when Type 1 navigation state is executed during the AT state, only push order navigation is executed, and when a color bell role is won, color navigation is not executed, resulting in a relatively small increase in the number of medals per unit game, and when Type 2 navigation state is executed during the AT state, both push order navigation and color navigation are executed, resulting in a relatively large increase in the number of medals per unit game.
However, in variant example 2 of the first embodiment, the condition for terminating the AT state is set as described above to when the number of medals acquired by the player during the AT state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 200 medals). Therefore, even if the amount of increase in medals per unit time differs, the number of medals acquired by the player as a result of the occurrence of one AT state will be the same.

The type of navigation state during the AT state can be selected by the player, and the main control device 10 determines which type is selected based on the player's operation of the bet button 2a as a predetermined operation means, for example.

FIG. 9 shows the effect images on the main display 8 at the start of the first game when the AT state begins and during game execution.
As described above, the main control unit 10 determines the type of navigation state when the AT state occurs, and the sub-control unit 20 executes a selection presentation on the main display 8 corresponding to the determination of the type of navigation state based on the control information from the main control unit 10.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the first game in the AT state is started, a first operation selection image 34a containing text information of "Type 1, push order navigation" for selecting and operating type 1 of the navigation state, and a second operation selection image 34b containing text information of "Type 2, push order navigation + color navigation" for selecting and operating type 2 of the navigation state are displayed side by side in the left-right direction in the main screen portion of the main display 8.

In addition, a remaining medal number image 33 that notifies the number of medals that can be acquired during the AT state is displayed on the upper right side of the screen of the main display 8.
In the first game during the AT state, the numerical information of the initial number of "200 medals" is displayed as the remaining medal number image 33, and every time a medal is acquired during the AT state, the numerical information is subtracted in accordance with the acquired number.
In addition, a game selection instruction image 35a consisting of text information "Select Game Type" is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8, which prompts the player to select the type of navigation state (game) during the AT state.

Although not shown in the figure, if the push order bell role is won in the first game of the AT state, the corresponding push order navigation will be displayed in parallel with the selection performance on the main display 8. However, only in the first game of the AT state, it is preferable not to execute the color navigation if the color bell role is won, even if Type 2 is selected after that.
In addition, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, it is also possible to prevent any navigation from being executed.

During the execution of the first game, the frame surrounding the first operation selection image 34a lights up as an initial state, indicating that the first operation selection image 34a is active at that time, and the illuminated operation selection images are alternated each time the player operates the bet button 2a, allowing the player to select the type of navigation state he or she desires.
Thereafter, when the game is ended (the last reel 4 is stopped) while the operation selection image corresponding to the type of navigation state desired by the player is illuminated, the type of navigation state corresponding to the illuminated operation selection image will be selected.

Note that Figure 9 illustrates an example in which type 1 navigation state is selected, and therefore, as shown in Figure 9 (b), after the game ends, only the first operation selection image 34a is displayed in approximately the center of the screen, informing the player of the type of navigation state that was selected.
Furthermore, after the game ends, a game selection result image 35b consisting of text information "Game Type 1 Determined" will be displayed at the bottom of the screen to notify that navigation state type 1 has been selected this time.

When the next game is started in this state, the first operation selection image 34a and the game selection result image 35b are erased, and the presentation image during the AT state or any selected navigation is executed, and the remaining medal count image 33 is displayed with a subtraction according to the medals acquired.

As described above, in variant example 2 of the first embodiment, when an AT state occurs, the type of navigation state to be executed during that AT state is determined by the player's selection, and the AT state is executed according to the selected type.
In other words, the slot machine 1 of variant example 2 of the first embodiment is provided with a selection means that allows the player to select whether to activate the color navigation (second stop operation notification means) in addition to activating the push order navigation (first stop operation notification means) when an AT state occurs as the first specific game state.
As a result, for example, when a navigation state of type 1 is selected, an AT state is generated in which the amount of medals won per unit game is smaller but the duration is longer, and when a navigation state of type 2 is selected, an AT state is generated in which the duration is shorter but the amount of medals won per unit game is greater.

Therefore, it becomes possible to generate an AT state according to the player's preference, thereby making it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction.
In addition, depending on the navigation state of the selected AT state, the manner in which medals are acquired and the duration during the AT state will change in various ways, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game by implementing a wider variety of game modes.

The functions of the first modification of the first embodiment may be provided in the slot machine 1 of the second modification.
For example, the duration of the pseudo bonus state may be determined by the number of times the color navigation is executed, and when the AT state occurs, the type of navigation state may be selectable.

The main control device 10 may also be provided with a periodic bonus granting means for executing a game that can grant a bonus periodically according to the progress of the game in the AT state. For example, a lottery may be held every 20 games to add a predetermined number of games to the number of remaining games in the AT state.
In this way, when Type 1 is selected, a large number of medals cannot be won in a short period of time, but the duration of the AT state will be relatively longer, so there will be more opportunities to win additional prizes, and it will be possible to increase the player's expectations for an additional number of games.

On the other hand, if Type 2 is selected, the duration of the AT state will be relatively shorter, resulting in fewer opportunities for additional draws, but a large number of medals can be obtained in a short period of time, which can increase the player's motivation to play.
Therefore, each type has its advantages and disadvantages, giving players a choice of game content to choose from.
As described above, the second modification of the first embodiment is realized.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment of the present invention, only a part of the configuration and control of the slot machine 1 differs from that of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the first embodiment, so below only the parts that differ from the first embodiment described above will be explained.

First, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the types of symbols on the reel 4 are different from those in the first embodiment described above, and each of the reels 4a to 4c displays a plurality of symbols (e.g., 20 symbols), and the types of symbols are, for example, “replay,” “watermelon,” “cherry,” “bell,” “BAR,” “7,” etc.
The "replay" and "bell" symbols are arranged on each of the reels 4a to 4c so that no eye-pressing is required, while the "cherry", "watermelon", "BAR", and "7" symbols are arranged on a specific reel 4 so that eye-pressing is required.
The reels 4 that require eye-pressing for the symbols “cherry”, “watermelon”, “BAR”, and “7” may be all of the reels 4 or may be some of the reels 4.
The shape of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of symbols on the periphery may be other than 20.

In addition, the combination of roles in the second embodiment is made up of a small role, a replay role, and a bonus role, and the small roles include a push order bell role, a watermelon role, and a cherry role.
As in the first embodiment described above, the push order bell role has six push order bell roles 1 to 6 in which the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in one push order (a specific push order) out of six possible push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c", "5c → 5b → 5a", etc.) and the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the push order bell role is won, regardless of which stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the first stop button 5 is operated in a specific push order, the reel 4 may be controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the push order bell role stops. In addition, the push order bell is not limited to six patterns, and three push order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
Also, unlike the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment does not include a color bell role, but the second embodiment may also include a color bell role, or a common bell role.

As with the first embodiment, the watermelon and cherry combinations are provided with strong and weak watermelon and strong and weak cherry combinations, and the winning symbol combinations are also the same as those described above.
As with the first embodiment described above, the replay role includes a normal replay role and a chance replay role (chance role), and the winning symbol combinations are also the same.
The benefits (number of medals, etc.) awarded when a small win or a replay win is achieved are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The bonus role is a role that, when won, transitions the game state to the bonus state described below. When a bonus role is won, reel 4 is controlled to stop so as to allow the symbol combination of "7-7-7" to appear on an active line, and when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" stops on an active line and the bonus role is won, the game state transitions to the bonus state.
Unlike the start of the pseudo-bonus state accompanied by the winning of a predetermined role, when a bonus role is won, no gaming value such as the payout of medals is awarded, and the right to win the bonus role is maintained until the bonus role is won.

[Game flow in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, the flow of a game on the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the gaming state in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment.
The main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 are capable of controlling the slot machine 1 to multiple gaming states, and perform various processes in each gaming state, control of transitions between gaming states (hereinafter simply referred to as "transitions"), etc. as follows.

As shown in FIG. 10, the game of the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is composed of multiple game states, including a normal game state, a bonus state, and an AT state. The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 are capable of controlling the transition from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Below, we will explain in detail for each game state (normal game state, bonus state, AT state) executed by the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20, the transition process between game states, and the various effects that occur in conjunction with the transition process.

Unless otherwise specified below, the transition from each game state to another game state basically occurs after the third reel is stopped in the game in which the transition condition is met (or after the medals have been paid out). However, this is not limited to this, and the transition may occur from the next game after the transition condition is met.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state is the gaming state in which the slot machine 1 remains when the main controller 10 is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
10, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transition to the bonus state and the AT state during the normal gaming state. Note that, depending on the specifications of the slot machine 1, it may be possible not to directly transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state.

During normal game play, similar to the first embodiment, individual effects, including winning effects that are completed in one game, are executed with a predetermined probability on the main display 8 or sub-display 17 based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state, which have different winning probability states to the AT state. The winning probability of the lottery to transition to the AT state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, and the transition of the probability state is controlled so that, for example, when a weak watermelon role or a weak cherry role is won, the normal probability state transitions to the high probability state with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, when a replay role is won, when a push order bell role is won, and when a miss occurs, the high probability state transitions to the normal probability state with a probability of 5%.
In response to the change in the probability state, a stage change process is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and in some high probability states, the stage is changed to one that suggests a high probability state.

Transition process from normal game state to bonus state (arrow a in FIG. 10)
In the normal gaming state, a bonus state (benefit) can be awarded as a special gaming state based on the result of the decision by the main control device 10 as to whether or not to award a benefit being a predetermined special decision result.

More specifically, the main control unit 10 performs stopping control to allow a special symbol combination ("7-7-7") on the reel 4 based on the winning of a bonus role as a special lottery result, and when the special symbol combination is derived on the reel 4 based on the player's operation, it determines that a special condition has been met and transitions the gaming state to a bonus state, which is a special gaming state advantageous to the player.
Therefore, while in the first embodiment of the slot machine 1 described above, it is possible for a pseudo-bonus state to be generated, in the second embodiment of the slot machine 1, it is possible for a bonus state (a so-called real bonus) to be generated without generating a pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a pseudo bonus state may be generated in addition to the bonus state.
In addition, the bonus role may be won at the same time as a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) (a double win), or may be won separately from other roles, or there may be both double win and single win patterns.
In addition, since the bonus role gives the player an opportunity to win a large number of medals, it is preferable to set the probability of winning the bonus role lower than that of the small role or the replay role (for example, set the probability to about 1/250).
In addition, the probability of winning a bonus role may be made variable in multiple stages according to the setting value of the probability setting device 14 .

In addition, when a bonus role is won during normal game play, a continuous presentation spanning a predetermined number of games, which is executed immediately before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment, is executed, for example, on the main display 8, to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.
When the continuous performance is executed, an image showing the main character winning the battle performance is displayed, and an image notifying the player that a bonus role has been won is displayed, and an image urging the player to stop a special symbol combination is displayed on the main display 8.
However, since it is possible to derive a special symbol combination even during a game in which a continuous performance is in progress, if a special symbol combination is derived during a game in which a continuous performance is in progress, the continuous performance will end at that point.

In addition, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, even in a game in which a bonus role is not won, a performance similar to the continuous performance is executed on the main display device 8. For example, if a bonus role is configured to be able to be won in combination with a predetermined rare role, when a predetermined rare role that has not won a bonus role is won, a continuous performance is executed in which the main character is ultimately defeated.

Transition process from normal gaming state to AT state (arrow c in FIG. 10)
In the normal game state, the main control device 10 performs a lottery process for transitioning to the AT state as a specific game state based on winning a predetermined rare role. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning this transition lottery.
In addition, in a game in a high probability state, control is performed to increase the probability of a lottery for transitioning to the AT state. For example, when a strong cherry role is won, the transition process to the AT state is performed with a higher probability (e.g., 2%) than the winning probability in a normal probability state.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state may be made on the condition that a specified rare role is won, or may be made with a specified probability (e.g., 1%) when a losing lottery result is derived in which no small role is won.

In this second embodiment, the transition to the AT state is mainly performed via the bonus state in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and therefore the probability of transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is set to be extremely low.
In addition, the probability of transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be made changeable depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, or the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal gaming state to the AT state may be won only in the case of a relatively high set value (e.g., setting 4 to 6).

Furthermore, in the case where the lottery for transition to the AT state is won during normal game play, a premonition effect (including consecutive effects) is executed after the waiting period has elapsed, similar to when the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment occurs, and the AT state occurs after the premonition effect ends.
In addition, if a specified rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won but the AT state is not entered, a fake premonition effect similar to that which occurs when the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment occurs is executed.

In addition, when the lottery for transitioning directly from the normal game state to the AT state is won, the consecutive effects may be executed immediately without executing the premonition effect, and the transition to the AT state may be made after the execution of the consecutive effects.
In addition, similar to the transition to the pseudo bonus state in the first embodiment, a CZ state that can transition to an AT state may be provided.

(Bonus state)
The bonus state as a special gaming state is a state in which the control relating to the lottery of winning combinations by the main control device 10 is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state.
That is, in the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment, a pseudo bonus state is generated as a state advantageous to the player, whereas in the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment, a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, is generated as a state advantageous to the player.

In the bonus state, the game continues until a predetermined number of games (e.g., 40 games) have been played, during which the lottery control for the roles is changed so that, for example, in a game in the bonus state, the probability of winning the push order bell role is made higher than in a game in the normal game state.
Also, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control device as a specific stop control means performs stop control such that when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the corresponding push order bell role wins only when a stop operation is performed in the push order (specific stop mode) corresponding to the winning push order bell role.

Note that control that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state may be other than the above. For example, the probability of winning a specified rare role may be made higher than in a game during the normal game state, or the probability of winning a replay role may be made lower than in a game during the normal game state, thereby increasing the opportunities to win the push order bell role. It is also possible not to increase the probability of winning the push order bell role.

In addition, the number of medals paid out when the push order bell role is won may be set to be different between the bonus state and other game states.
For example, when the push order bell role is won during the normal game state, six medals are paid out, but when the push order bell role is won during the bonus state, fifteen medals may be paid out.

During the bonus state, based on control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20, which acts as a specific operation notification means, executes push order navigation for the aforementioned push order bell role to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, making it easy to win medals.
However, push order navigation is not executed during the entire bonus state. Rather, push order navigation is executable during the first half of the bonus state, during which a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 times) are played as a first period, and then push order navigation is not executable during the second half of the bonus state, during which a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 times) are played as a second period.

Therefore, in the games between when the bonus state starts and when a predetermined number of games have been played, if any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the specific push order corresponding to the won push order bell role is announced and push order navigation is executed, and in the games after the predetermined number of games have been played, even if any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the specific push order corresponding to the won push order bell role is not announced and push order navigation is not executed.

In addition, in the latter half of the bonus state, the main control device 10 controls the lottery process for transition to the AT state to be advantageous to the player, and controls the lottery process so that the player wins the AT state with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%) for each game.
In addition, the probability of winning the AT state may be any value that is advantageous to the player in transitioning to the AT state, and it is preferable that the probability be a value higher than the probability of winning the AT state during the normal probability state in the normal game state (e.g., 1%).

In addition, in a game during a bonus state, if a rare role is won, the probability of winning the AT state may be higher than if other roles (for example, a push order bell role) are won. For example, if a strong cherry role is won, the probability of winning the AT state may be controlled to be 25%.
In addition, the lottery for transition to the AT state may not be conducted during the normal gaming state, but may be conducted only during the bonus state.
In addition, in the first half of the bonus state, the lottery for transition to the AT state may be conducted with a lower probability (for example, 1%) than in the second half, or the lottery for transition to the AT state may not be conducted in the first half.

As described below, if the AT state transition lottery is won while in the bonus state, the game state will transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends. During the bonus state, various presentations based on the AT state transition lottery will be executed, for example on the main display 8, by the sub-control device 20, which acts as a presentation control means.
Furthermore, when the bonus state occurs, the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner to notify that the bonus state is in progress, and the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect to notify that the bonus state is in progress.

First, in the first half of the bonus state, as a bonus state effect, for example, an effect image introducing the characters that appear is displayed, and if the push order bell role is won, a push order navigation is executed on the main display 8.
Then, when the game moves to the latter half of the bonus state, a high probability state presentation is executed on the main display 8 to inform the player that the lottery for transition to the AT state is being held with a high probability.
For example, as a pre-show to the battle performance that will be executed later, an image showing a main character facing an enemy character is displayed to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, when the game moves to the latter half of the bonus state, the light emission state of the lamp 11 is changed from that of the bonus state to that indicating that the game is in a high probability state, and the sound effect from the speaker 9 is also changed from that of the bonus state to that of the high probability state.

In addition, in the pre-performance, which is a performance during a high probability state, an expectation-increasing performance is executed, and by executing the expectation-increasing performance, for example, the image state of the main character (for example, an aura image surrounding the main character) changes to a higher level out of the multiple levels of images set, thereby notifying the player that there is an increased possibility that the main character will win the subsequent battle performance, i.e., transition to the AT state.
The expectation-boosting effect is executed with a predetermined probability for each game, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, it is executed with a higher probability than if the lottery is not won, and if the image state of the main character actually changes to a higher stage, the probability of transitioning to the AT state increases.

In addition, during the final stage of the second half of the bonus state, that is, for a few games (e.g., three games) before the end of the bonus state, continuous effects are executed in the same manner as during the premonition effects of the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment described above.
The consecutive performances (battle performances) that are executed at the end of the second half of this bonus state are executed based on the results of the AT state transition lottery that has already been executed, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, the battle performance will inform the player that the main character will ultimately win and transition to the AT state will occur, and if the AT state transition lottery is not won, the battle performance will inform the player that the main character will ultimately be defeated and there will be no transition to the AT state.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the AT state transition lottery that is held during the bonus state is won, the bonus state will be active for a preset period of time (e.g., 40 games), and even if a transition to the AT state occurs, the transition will only occur after this period has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the bonus state, information indicating that the state is the bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18 .
However, even when the bonus state is entered, the period during which the player can win a large number of medals is only the first half during which the push order navigation is executed, so the output of information indicating that the player is in the bonus state will end when the first half of the bonus state ends.

Therefore, even if the gaming establishment uses a lamp or image display device to notify the player that the slot machine 1 is in the bonus state based on the output of information indicating the bonus state from a call device (not shown) in the island equipment, the notification will end when the game enters the latter half of the bonus state, and will switch to the same notification as during the normal game state.

In the second embodiment, in the latter half of the bonus state, the main display 8 displays a presentation image in which the main character and enemy character face off against each other, but it is also possible to display an image similar to the image (stage) that suggests a high probability state during the normal game state.
In other words, in the latter half of the bonus state, since push order navigation is not executed, the medal acquisition status is essentially the same as during the normal game state, so by displaying an image similar to that during the normal game state, the player can be given accurate notification corresponding to the medal acquisition status.

In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, a color bell role may be provided and a color navigation corresponding to the color bell role may be executed in the first half of the bonus state, or both the push order navigation and the color navigation may be executed in the first half of the bonus state and only the push order navigation may be executed in the second half.

・Transition process from bonus state to AT state (arrow e in FIG. 10)
The bonus state ends when a predetermined ending condition is met.
The condition for terminating the bonus state may be anything, for example when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 100 medals), or when the number of games played during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 40 times). Also, if the number of medals paid out or the number of games played during the bonus state are not notified to the player in advance of the establishment of the condition for terminating the bonus state, the player will not be able to know in advance the number of games in the continuous performance executed at the end of the bonus state, which can increase the player's sense of anticipation.
Then, at the end of the bonus state, if the player wins the lottery for transition to the AT state executed during the bonus state, the game state will transition from the bonus state to the AT state.
As mentioned above, at the end of the bonus state, a continuous performance will be executed for a predetermined number of games, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, an image showing the main character winning as a result of the continuous performance will be displayed after the end of the final game of the bonus state, and an image notifying the transition to the AT state will be displayed on the main display 8, and the game state will transition to the AT state from the next game.

Transition process from bonus state to normal game state (arrow b in FIG. 10)
At the end of the bonus state, if the player does not win the lottery for transition to the AT state executed during the bonus state, the game state transitions from the bonus state to a normal game state after a prescribed number of games are executed during the bonus state.
At this time, after the final game in the bonus state ends, an image showing the main character being defeated as a result of the consecutive effects and an image notifying that there will be no transition to the AT state are displayed on the main display 8, and the game state will transition to the normal game state from the next game.

When transitioning from the bonus state to the normal game state, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 may be notified by the notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) under the control of the sub-control device 20 based on control information from the main control device 10. For example, a predetermined character may be displayed from among multiple characters on the main display device 8 or sub-display 17, and the displayed character may be selected according to a selection probability that is preset in accordance with each setting value of the probability setting device 14, making it possible to predict the setting value to some extent from the displayed character.

In addition, the bonus state is set to end when a preset number of games have been played, but the bonus state may also be set to end when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches a specified number, or the bonus state may be set to end based on the satisfaction of either the playing of a specified number of games or the payout of a specified number of medals.
In addition, when the bonus state is to be ended when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches a specified number, it is preferable to allow the first half of the bonus state to continue for a fixed number of games.
In this case, the bonus state ends when the total number of medals paid out due to the accidental winning of the push order bell role reaches a specified number in the latter half of the bonus state, so the number of continuing games in the latter half can change for each bonus state, and the possibility of transitioning to the AT state changes.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is continuously performed during the period in which the game is in the AT state to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.
However, unlike the bonus state, the control of the selection of roles is the same as in the normal game state, so the control of the selection of the push order bell role that is the target of the push order navigation is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

During the AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) granted at the time of the initial transition to the AT state is managed as the remaining number of games that can continue the AT state, and the remaining number of games is subtracted for each game, and the AT state continues until there are no remaining games.
When there are no more games remaining in the AT state, the AT state ends.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is sent from the main control device 10 to the sub-control device 20, and under the control of the sub-control device 20, images of various effects during the AT state are displayed on the main display device 8. In addition, the number of games remaining during the AT state, the total number of medals won during a series of AT states, and the total number of games played during the AT state are displayed on the main display device 8.

The continuation lottery process for the AT state is also similar to that of the first embodiment described above, and the continuation lottery process for the AT state is performed in a predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) executed at the end of the AT state.
When the result of the match lottery in each game during the lottery game period is a win twice, it is determined that the continuation condition is established, the continuation of the AT state is decided, and a new AT state starts after the end of the ongoing AT state.

In addition, in the new AT state, the continuation of the AT state itself is managed in the same manner as during the initial transition to the AT state, and the AT state ends when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 30 games) have been played; however, in the predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) played at the end of this new AT state, a lottery process for the continuation of the AT state is performed in the same manner as during the initial transition.
Therefore, the AT state is repeatedly executed depending on whether the continuation condition is met in the continuation lottery process during each AT state.
In addition, the winning probability of the match lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period in the AT state is set not to be constant, as in the first embodiment described above.

The probability of winning each match lottery during the lottery game period in the AT state may be the same. In addition, multiple lottery modes for the lottery game period in the AT state may be set and may be changeable based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, or may be changeable based on the player's operation, allowing the player to select according to their preference.

Also, similar to the first embodiment described above, even during the lottery game period in the AT state, continuous character presentations are executed on the main display 8 by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main control unit 10 in response to the execution of the game.
Regarding the continuous performances during the AT state, the battle performance is completed for each game, and the battle performance is executed based on the winning probability set for each game, and the friendly characters (including the main character) who compete against the enemy characters for each game appear in different types corresponding to the winning probability.

If the match lottery for each game is won, the friendly character that appears wins at the end of the game, and if the match lottery is not won, the friendly character that appears loses at the end of the game, and this presentation is carried out in a complete manner for each game.
If two of the three games are selected as winning games, the continuation of the next AT state is confirmed.

In addition, in order to increase interest in the game during periods other than the lottery game period during the AT state, the AT state performance in which a specific character appears is displayed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17. In the AT state performance, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a specific piece of music is output from the speaker 9.

On the other hand, during the lottery game period in the AT state, the background during the battle presentation and the content of the offense and defense during the battle presentation change depending on the type of battle lottery, thereby changing the sense of expectation for the continuation of the AT state.
In addition, the execution control of the push order navigation during the AT state may be different from that during the bonus state. For example, if the push order bell role is won during the bonus state, push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 100%), and if the push order bell role is won during the AT state, push order navigation may be executed with a lower probability than during the bonus state (e.g., 60%), thereby resulting in a change in the number of medals that can be won during the bonus state and the AT state.

-Transition process from AT state to bonus state (arrow f in FIG. 10)
During the AT state, as in the normal gaming state, a bonus state (benefit) can be granted as a special gaming state based on the result of a lottery by the main control device 10 as to whether or not to grant a benefit being a predetermined special lottery result.

Therefore, when a bonus role is won as a result of a role selection by the main control unit 10 during a game in the AT state, stopping control is performed to allow a special symbol combination ("7-7-7") to appear on the reel 4, and when the special symbol combination is derived on the reel 4 based on the player's operation, the game state transitions to a bonus state, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.
In addition, if a bonus role is won during the AT state, it is preferable to temporarily stop (deactivate) the execution of the push order navigation until the game state transitions to the bonus state.

If the lottery for transition to the bonus state during the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state transitions to the bonus state.
Therefore, the remaining number of games in the AT state is reserved when transitioning to the bonus state, and when the AT state is returned to again, the AT state is resumed (arrow e in Figure 10) based on the reserved remaining number of games.

However, when the AT state transitions to the bonus state, unlike when the bonus state transitions to the normal game state, the AT state transition lottery process is not performed, and when a predetermined number of games have been played, the bonus state ends and the AT state is restored.

In addition, even if the AT state transitions to the bonus state, a continuation lottery period similar to that described above may be set and a lottery process for the AT state may be performed to increase the right to continue the AT state.
Also, when the bonus state transition lottery is won during the AT state, the transition to the bonus state may not be notified immediately, but the transition to the bonus state may be notified after a battle presentation (a battle presentation in which the protagonist wins) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, three games) as described above. However, even in this case, if a special symbol combination is derived on the reel 4 during the battle presentation, the battle presentation will be stopped and the transition to the bonus state will be made.
In addition, if a rare role that can be won in combination with a bonus role is won during the AT state, but the bonus role is not won, a battle performance (a battle performance in which the protagonist is defeated) may be executed.

In addition, when transitioning from the AT state to the bonus state, the push order navigation may be executed for the entire period during the bonus state.
In other words, when transitioning from the normal game state to the bonus state, push order navigation is executed only in the first half of the bonus state, but when transitioning from the AT state to the bonus state, push order navigation may be executed in both the first and second half of the bonus state.
In this way, it is possible to increase the number of medals won when the AT state transitions to the bonus state, which further increases the total number of medals won when the AT state and the bonus state occur consecutively, thereby greatly heightening the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, when the AT state transitions to the bonus state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times) may be added to the remaining number of games in the AT state.

Transition process from AT state to normal gaming state (arrow d in FIG. 10)
In the AT state, if the conditions for continuing the AT state are not met and the right to continue to the next AT state is not granted, that is, if two winning results are not derived in the match lottery for each game during the lottery game period in the AT state, the game transitions to the normal game state after the AT state ends.
In this second embodiment, too, if a non-winning result in the match lottery is derived twice in a game during the lottery game period, the non-establishment of the special condition is confirmed, so when a non-winning result in the match lottery is derived twice in any game during the lottery game period, the condition for terminating the AT state is established, and the game state transitions to the normal game state from the next game.
Therefore, the duration of the currently executed AT state will change depending on the result of the game match lottery during the lottery game period.

In addition, since push order navigation is performed during the lottery game period, even if the special conditions are not met in the continuation lottery process in the AT state, the longer the lottery game period continues without two non-winning matches, the more opportunities there are to win medals, which makes the player more advantageous.
It should be noted that push order navigation for the push order bell role is performed even in games during the lottery game period, but push order navigation may not be performed in games during the lottery game period, or push order navigation may be performed only with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

When the AT state is changed to the normal game state, the winning probability state of the AT state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the winning probability state may be changed to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that the aforementioned limiting control (limiter control) will be performed during the high probability state, but if limiting control is performed during the high probability state, the state will be transitioned to the normal probability state.

In addition, at the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), and during the ending state (ending period), the game progress is temporarily disabled, and after the ending state ends, the game transitions to the normal game state.
During the ending state, setting-related information that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20. For example, a predetermined image is displayed on the main display device 8 and the sub-display device 17, and a predetermined sound is output by the speaker 9.
As described above, the gaming state is transitioned in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

[Game state transition and display contents on the main display unit in the second embodiment]
Next, referring to the timing chart of Figure 11, the transition of the game state realized by the control of the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the display contents on the main display unit 8 will be described, in particular, the transition of the game state when the game state changes in the order of normal game state → bonus state → AT state, and the display contents on the main display unit 8.

FIG. 11 shows the corresponding relationship between the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the bonus state, and the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, and the change in the display content on the main display 8 during that time.
Specifically, under the control of the main control device 10, a bonus role is won in the normal game state, and when a special symbol combination stops on the reel 4 in the subsequent game, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the bonus state, and further, when the AT state is transitioned to by winning the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state, the navigation state and the presentation content (presentation image) displayed on the main display 8 are shown.
It should be noted that FIG. 11 shows the period after the bonus combination is won during the normal gaming state, and omits the period before that.

In this second embodiment, too, the main control unit 10 controls the drawing of various bonuses and changes to various game states (including the time of change), and transmits control information related to this control from the main control unit 10 to the sub-control unit 20, which then controls the various corresponding displays.
The start time and duration of effects that are not directly related to changes in the game state (for example, fake premonition effects, etc.) may be controlled by the sub-controller 20 based on control information received from the main controller 10, or may be controlled independently by the sub-controller 20 without receiving control information from the main controller 10. However, it is necessary to receive control information that triggers the effects (for example, information on winning a rare role, etc.).

First, as shown in FIG. 11, if a bonus role is won during normal gameplay when a transition to a bonus state has not yet been determined, a continuous performance is executed on the main display 8 as described above, and in the final game of this continuous performance (the first game shown), an image of the main character winning or an image announcing a transition to a pseudo bonus state is displayed on the main display 8.
In addition, during normal game play, push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed.

Then, in the second game, a stop promotion effect is executed on the main display 8 to encourage the stopping of a special pattern combination corresponding to a bonus role, and when the special pattern combination corresponding to a bonus role stops on the reel 4 due to the player's stop operation, an image to notify the occurrence of a bonus state, such as text information such as "Congratulations on the big bonus" or a specified character image, is displayed on the main display 8.
The winning state of the bonus role is maintained unless a transition to a bonus state occurs, and while the winning state continues, stopping control of the reel 4 capable of stopping a special symbol combination is performed.
However, if control is performed to give priority to the winning of another role (for example, a replay role) in the held state, the special symbol combination cannot be stopped even in the held state when the other role is won.

Then, if a special symbol combination is stopped on reel 4 in the second game, the game state will transition from the normal game state to the bonus state from the start of the third game (timing t5).
When the game state transitions to the bonus state, the first half of the bonus state is started first, and based on the control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20 activates the control of the push order navigation, and if any of the push order bell roles is won, it will control the state to execute the push order navigation corresponding to that role.
Therefore, in the first half of the bonus state, the push order navigation is continuously executed, making it extremely easy to win medals.
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the bonus state, the main control device 10 continues to output, via the external output terminal 18, information informing the management device that the gaming state has transitioned to the bonus state.

The first half of the bonus state is set until a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 times) have been played, and if any of the push order bell roles is won during this time, the push order navigation corresponding to that role is executed on the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12.
Also, in the first half of the bonus state, as described above, as a bonus state effect, for example, an effect image introducing the characters that appear is displayed on the main display 8 together with the push order navigation.

Then, when the 33rd game starts (timing t6), the game transitions to the latter half of the bonus state, and the control of the push order navigation is disabled, so that even if one of the push order bell roles is won, the corresponding push order navigation will not be executed.
In addition, when the game moves to the latter half of the bonus state, the game enters a state in which the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is executed with a high probability, and as a presentation during the high probability state to inform the player that the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is executed with a high probability, an image in which the main character and enemy character face off against each other is displayed on the main display 8 as a pre-performance of the battle performance.

In addition, when the game moves to the latter half of the bonus state, the light emission state of the lamp 11 is changed from that of the bonus state to that indicating that the game is in a high probability state, and the sound effect from the speaker 9 is also changed from that of the bonus state to that of the high probability state.
Furthermore, as the gaming state transitions to the latter half of the bonus state, the output information from the external output terminal 18 is changed from information indicating the bonus state to information indicating the normal gaming state.

Then, when the 40th game, which is part of the latter half of the bonus state, starts (timing t7), a continuous performance (battle performance) based on the lottery for transition to the AT state executed during the high probability state is executed on the main display device 8. The continuous performance is executed across the 40th to 42nd games.
Figure 11 shows an example of a transition to the AT state, so that after the final game in the bonus state is completed, an image of the main character winning or an image announcing a transition to the AT state will be displayed on the main display 8.
When the 42nd game ends, the condition for ending the bonus state is met and the current bonus state ends.

Then, from the start of the 43rd game (timing t8), the gaming state transitions to the AT state, and the main display 8 displays an effect image for the AT state.
In addition, when the game state transitions to the AT state, the sub-controller 20 activates the control of the push order navigation based on the control information from the main control unit 10, and if any of the push order bell roles is won, the sub-controller 20 will control the state to execute the push order navigation corresponding to that role.

Therefore, the control of the push order navigation, which was deactivated in the latter half of the bonus state, is reactivated by the transition to the AT state.
Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to the AT state, the main control device 10 will continue to output, via the external output terminal 18, information informing the management device that the gaming state has transitioned to the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the main control unit 10 performs control to cause the winning push order bell role to win only when the stopping operation is performed in a specific push order corresponding to the winning push order bell role.
In other words, the main control device 10 constitutes a specific stop control means that can cause the variable display means to output a pattern combination that will result in a winning push order bell role as a specific stop mode that can grant a specified bonus, based on a stop operation by the player using a specific push order as a specified stop operation mode.

In addition, based on control information from the main control unit 10, the sub-control unit 20 controls the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12 to notify the player of the specific push order to win the winning push order bell role during the first half of the bonus state or during the AT state.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 constitutes a stop operation notification means capable of notifying the player of a specific push order in a recognizable manner as a predetermined stop operation mode in a game in which the winning push order bell role can be won.

Furthermore, when a bonus state occurs, push order navigation is executed in the first half of the bonus state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 constitutes a notification control means that executes (activates) push order navigation by the sub-control unit 20 as a stop operation notification means during the first period of the special game state, that is, during the first half of the bonus state.

Since the push order navigation is only performed for a specified period during the bonus state, it is possible to generate a novel bonus state that has never been seen before, making the game more entertaining.

In addition, in the latter half of the bonus state, the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state.
In other words, the main control unit 10 as a lottery means is capable of executing a lottery to generate an AT state as a specific bonus based on the execution of the game in the latter half of the bonus state as a second period different from the first period during the special game state.

Therefore, in the latter half of the bonus state, a lottery for the AT state is carried out, which can heighten the player's sense of anticipation.
In addition, in the latter half of the bonus state, the lottery for the AT state is executed with a higher probability than in the normal game state, which can further increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in the latter half of the bonus state, effects and consecutive effects that are typical of the high probability state are executed.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 constitutes a presentation control means capable of executing a predetermined presentation in a game in the latter half of the bonus state as the second period in the special gaming state.
Therefore, in the latter half of the bonus state, it is possible to execute highly entertaining games that effectively heighten the player's sense of expectation.

Also, in the latter half of the bonus state, the push order navigation will not be executed.
In other words, the main control unit 10, as a notification control means, controls the sub-control unit 20, as a stop operation notification means, to not execute (deactivate) the push order navigation during the latter half of the bonus state, which is the second period of the special game state.

Therefore, in the latter half of the bonus state, push order navigation is not executed, but only in the first half, making it possible to generate a bonus state in which the benefits of the gaming facility and the player are balanced.
In addition, since the AT state is selected by lottery even if the push order navigation is not executed, when a bonus state occurs, it is possible to create a state that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during the latter half of the bonus state, the AT state will occur after the bonus state ends.
In other words, when the main control device 10, which acts as a lottery means, derives a lottery result for transition to an AT state as a specific bonus, the AT state can be generated as a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the bonus state, which is a special gaming state, ends.
Therefore, when a bonus state occurs, the possibility of an AT state occurring also increases, making it possible to greatly heighten the player's sense of expectation.

Also, in the first half of the bonus state, for example, a presentation introducing the characters that will appear is executed, whereas in the second half of the bonus state, presentations during the high probability state and consecutive presentations are executed.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 as a presentation control means is capable of executing different presentations in the first half (first period) and the second half (second period) of the bonus state.
Therefore, appropriate presentation can be executed in response to the various controls that change during the bonus state, making it possible to execute highly entertaining presentations that will not tire the player throughout the bonus state.

It should be noted that each of the first and second halves of the bonus state may be set to any number of games within the duration of the bonus state.
In addition, the bonus state is configured to end when the number of games played reaches a predetermined number, but it may also end when the number of medals won or paid out as prize medals during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number.
In this case, if the number of medals acquired or paid out in the first half of the bonus state meets the conditions for terminating the bonus state, the bonus state will end midway through the first half without transitioning to the second half, so it is preferable to set the number of games in the first half so that the conditions for terminating the bonus state based on the number of medals are not met in the first half.

In addition, it may be possible to generate a plurality of bonus states with different durations. For example, it may be possible to generate a regular bonus state with a duration of 20 games and conditional on winning a regular bonus role, and a big bonus state with a duration of 40 games and conditional on winning a big bonus role.
In this case, push order navigation is executed throughout the entire period of the regular bonus state, and during a predetermined period (e.g., 20 games) during the normal game state immediately after the end of the regular bonus state, a high probability state presentation (fake high probability presentation) may be executed, similar to the latter half of the big bonus state, despite the normal probability state.

In this way, even if the regular bonus state occurs, the actual number of medals won will be the same as in the big bonus state, but since the big bonus state is more advantageous to the player in the AT state transition lottery, it is possible to generate a special gaming state with a strong contrast.Furthermore, since fake high probability effects are executed even in the regular bonus state, it is also possible to give the player a certain degree of expectation.
Also, in the regular bonus state, similar to the bonus state described above, push order navigation and lottery control may be performed by dividing the state into a first half and a second half, and the ratio between the first half and the second half may be set to different values between the regular bonus state and the big bonus state.

In addition, the main control device 10 may execute control to make the execution mode of a bonus state that occurs during a normal gaming state different from the execution mode of a bonus state that occurs during an AT state.
For example, if a bonus state occurs during normal game play, the button press sequence navigation is executed only in the first half, as described above, but if a bonus state occurs during an AT state, the button press sequence navigation may be executed for the entire period of the bonus state, or the first half may be extended.

In other words, the main control unit 10, as a notification control means, executes push order navigation (activates the stop operation notification means) in the latter half (second period) when a bonus state as a special gaming state occurs during an AT state as a specific gaming state, while it controls not to execute push order navigation (deactivates the stop operation notification means) in the latter half when the bonus state occurs outside the AT state.
Therefore, if the AT state and the bonus state occur in succession, the push order navigation will be executed throughout the entire period of the bonus state, making it possible to realize an extremely exciting game in which a large number of medals can be won in a synergistic manner.

Conversely, if a bonus state occurs during the AT state, the first half may be shortened, or push order navigation may not be executed during the entire bonus state.
In this way, when an AT state and a bonus state occur, the period during which the right to continue the AT state is selected is lengthened, increasing the possibility that the AT state will continue, which in turn increases the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when executing control to make the execution mode of a bonus state that occurs during a normal game state different from the execution mode of a bonus state that occurs during an AT state, the execution probability of the push order navigation may be made different.
For example, if a bonus state occurs during normal game play, push order navigation will always be executed if the push order bell role is won, but if a bonus state occurs during the AT state, push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 60%) if the push order bell role is won.

In this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of medals won when the AT state and bonus state occur in succession. Also, by setting the execution probability of push order navigation during the AT state lower than during the bonus state that occurs during the normal game state, and executing push order navigation during the bonus state that occurs during the AT state with the same execution probability as this value, even when moving from the AT state to the bonus state, the push order navigation will be executed with the same execution probability, making it possible to execute the bonus state without giving the player any sense of discomfort.

In addition, when an ending performance is executed based on a prior determination by the limiter, in the bonus state that occurs during the ending performance, push order navigation may be executed for the entire period.
In this way, it is possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied with periods when the push order navigation is not executed even though the ending performance is being executed.

Also, a so-called freeze state may be provided in which the progress of the game is temporarily suspended during the bonus state game.
For example, after the final game of the first half is completed, the game progress may be suspended for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), and during this suspension period, a presentation image may be displayed on the main display 8 or the like to inform the player that the push order navigation will end and that a lottery for the AT state will be held with a high probability.

In addition, when playing a game, it may be possible to set 1 bet in addition to 3 bets, and in a specified game during the bonus state, a game may be played in which only a specified line (e.g., the middle line) is made valid by setting 1 bet, and in this game, a symbol that disables the pull-in stop control may be stopped on the specified line (so-called JAC removal), resulting in a winning result in which a specified number of medals (e.g., 14 medals) are paid out, making it possible to adjust the number of medals paid out during the bonus state.
In this way, when the bonus state is ended based on the number of medals paid out during the bonus state, it is possible to reduce the number of games in which the number of medals paid out is adjusted and to obtain the maximum number of medals.
The slot machine 1 in the second embodiment is configured as described above.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, a first modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, the bonus state is fixedly divided into a first half in which push order navigation is executed and a second half in which push order navigation is not executed, but in variant example 1 of the second embodiment, the duration of the first and second half of the bonus state can be changed.
Therefore, only the settings of the first and second halves of the bonus state are different from those of the second embodiment described above, and the other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the first modified example of the second embodiment, the main control device 10 can generate a bonus 1 state and a bonus 2 state.
However, the duration of the bonus state is the same in the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, and the winning combination selection state is also controlled in the same way.
The difference between the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state is the ratio between the first and second halves. The main control unit 10 changes the timing of switching between the first and second halves so that, for example, in the Bonus 1 state, the first half ends when 20 games have been played from the start (timing t9), whereas in the Bonus 2 state, the first half ends when 25 games have been played from the start (timing t10).
Therefore, since the push order navigation during the bonus state is only executed in the first half as described above, the number of medals won is greater in the Bonus 2 state (large number of medals won) than in the Bonus 1 state (medium number of medals won) because the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set to be longer.

On the other hand, as described above, the lottery for transitioning to the AT state during the bonus state is also executed with a high probability in the latter half of the state, so the probability of transitioning to the AT state is higher in the Bonus 1 state than in the Bonus 2 state because the latter half of the state is set longer.
In addition, in the latter half of the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state, similar to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, a presentation for a high probability state is executed to notify the player that the transition lottery to the AT state is being held in a high probability state.
In addition, since the advantage to the player is set to be higher the longer the first half, the bonus 2 state will be more advantageous to the player even if the lottery period for the AT state is shortened.

In addition, the selection of whether to generate the Bonus 1 state or the Bonus 2 state is controlled by the main control unit 10 when a bonus role is won, and when a predetermined condition is met and the lottery probability state of the AT state during the normal game state is a high probability state, the probability of the Bonus 2 state being selected is controlled to be higher than when it is in the normal probability state.
For example, when the normal probability state is established, the bonus 2 state is selected with a predetermined probability (e.g., 40%), whereas when the high probability state is established, the bonus 2 state is selected with a probability higher than the predetermined probability (e.g., 60%).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 in variant example 1 of the second embodiment, when a bonus state is generated, the length of the first half of the bonus state in which the push order navigation is activated can be changed.
In other words, the main control device 10 constitutes a change control means capable of changing the length of the first half as the first period during the bonus state as the special gaming state.
Therefore, a wider variety of bonus states can be generated, which can change the player's expectations and increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, the ratio between the first and second halves when generating bonus states with different execution modes may be other than those described above, and may be any value as long as the occurrence of different bonus states changes the player's degree of advantage.
In addition, in a bonus state in which the period of the first half is relatively short, the first half may not be generated, i.e., the entire period of the bonus state may be the second half in which the AT state is selected with a high probability, and conversely, in a bonus state in which the period of the first half is relatively long, the second half may not be generated, i.e., the entire period of the bonus state may be the first half in which the push order navigation is executed.

In addition, although bonus states with different execution modes are generated based on winning the same bonus role, a bonus role may be set for each bonus state with different execution modes.

The condition for selecting a bonus state with a different execution mode is the probability state at the time when the bonus role is won, but it can be something else. For example, when a bonus state is won, if the number of games played since the end of the previous bonus state or the number of games played since the end of the previous AT state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 300 times), a highly advantageous bonus state may be generated.

In addition, a bonus state having a different execution mode may be selectively generated with a predetermined probability, regardless of the probability state of the AT state lottery.
In addition, the selection rate when selecting a bonus state with a different execution mode may be changed depending on the probability setting value in the probability setting device 14. For example, the selection rate may be controlled so that a more advantageous bonus state is selected in the case of a relatively high probability setting value than in the case of a low probability setting value.

Also, bonus states with different execution modes may be selectable based on the player's selection operation. In this case, however, it is preferable to equalize the degree of advantage in each bonus state.

The probability of executing the push order navigation may be changed for each bonus state with a different execution mode. For example, in the first half of the bonus 1 state, the push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 70%) when the push order bell role is won, but in the first half of the bonus 2 state, the push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (e.g., 100%) when the push order bell role is won.

In addition, when a bonus state is generated during normal game play, the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state are selectively generated as described above, but when a bonus state is generated during an AT state, a bonus state may be generated in a different manner from the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state, in which the push order navigation is executed throughout the entire period, i.e., the push order navigation is executed (activated) even in the latter half of the bonus state.

In addition, the execution mode of the bonus state is determined when a bonus role is won, but when a specific game is executed in the first half of the bonus state, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to continue the first half, and whether or not to continue the first half may be determined based on the result of the lottery. In this case, it is preferable to hold a lottery such that the probability of the first half continuing is higher for a highly advantageous bonus state than for a less advantageous bonus state.

In addition, the probability of winning the AT state in the latter half of the bonus state may be set much higher than during the normal game state, so that the bonus state, which has a longer period in the latter half, is more advantageous.
The slot machine 1 according to the first modified example of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

[Effects at the start of the bonus 1 state in the first modified example of the second embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a description will be given of the presentation executed on the main display 8 when the bonus 1 state is started in the first modified example of the second embodiment.
FIG. 13 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 that is executed during and after a game in which a special symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role can be stopped on the reel 4 after a bonus role has been won.

First, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when a game in which a special symbol combination can be stopped is executed, a variable display is started on the reel 4 as a variable display means, and also on the main display 8, a variable image display using image symbols is started.
The image changing display is performed, for example, by scrolling each of image reels 40a to 40c, which are composed of image patterns similar to the respective patterns and pattern arrangements displayed on reels 4a to 4c, from top to bottom in the main part of the screen of the main display 8.

Therefore, an image varying display is executed on the main display 8 in response to the varying display on the reels 4a to 4c.
The scroll speed of the image varying display (the moving speed of the image symbols) may be any speed, but it is preferable that the speed is high enough that the player cannot distinguish the image symbols.
Thereafter, when it becomes possible to stop the reel 4, the stop operation of the stop button 5 becomes valid, and in response to the stop operation of the stop button 5, the corresponding reel 4 stops.

FIG. 13(b) shows the stopping state of the reel 4 and the presentation image on the main display 8 when all the reels 4 are stopped by the stop operation of the stop button 5 and a special pattern combination corresponding to a bonus role stops on the reel 4.
As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the 7 symbol 50 stops on each of the reels 4a to 4c as a special symbol combination at the end of the game, the image variation display of the image symbols on the main display 8 also stops, and the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d corresponding to the special symbol combination on the reel 4 also stops on the main display 8.

FIG. 13 shows a case where the BONUS 1 state occurs, so that the image symbols of "BAR, BAR, BAR" corresponding to the BONUS 1 state are stopped as the BONUS 1 symbol combination image 40d.
At this time, the image symbols "BAR, BAR, BAR" are stopped individually in correspondence with the stopping of each of the reels 4a to 4c.
In addition, above the BONUS 1 symbol combination image 40d, a BONUS 1 notification image 40e consisting of text information of "REGULAR BONUS" is displayed to notify the occurrence of the BONUS 1 state.
In addition, in a game in which a special symbol combination can be stopped, if the special symbol combination is not stopped on the reel 4 due to a player's mistake in stopping operation, etc., a losing symbol combination image different from the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d is displayed.
The losing symbol combination may be any image other than the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d. For example, if the 7 symbol 50 cannot be stopped on only the right reel 4c, a losing symbol combination image of "BAR, BAR, -" may be displayed.

The "BAR BAR BAR" in the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and the "regular bonus" in the bonus 1 notification image 40e generally refer to symbol combinations and their values that correspond to a less favorable bonus state among bonus states, so by displaying the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and the bonus 1 notification image 40e, it is possible to make the player aware that a less favorable bonus 1 state has occurred.

In this way, when a bonus state is generated, the main control device 10 determines whether to generate a Bonus 1 state or a Bonus 2 state, and if the Bonus 1 state is generated, a Bonus 1 pattern combination image 40d or a Bonus 1 notification image 40e is displayed in response to the stopping of a special pattern combination on the reel 4, to notify the occurrence of the Bonus 1 state.
Therefore, the player can play during the bonus 1 state while being sure that the bonus 1 state has occurred.

Then, when the next game is played, the game state transitions to the BONUS 1 state, and the BONUS 1 pattern combination image 40d and the BONUS 1 notification image 40e on the main display 8 are erased, and an image during the BONUS 1 state, such as the number of remaining games in the first half of the BONUS 1 state (e.g., 20 games), is displayed.
As described above, the presentation at the start of the bonus 1 state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment is executed.

[Effects at the start of the bonus 2 state in the first modified example of the second embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the presentation executed on the main display 8 when the BONUS 2 state in the first modified example of the second embodiment is started.
FIG. 14 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 that is executed during a game in which a special symbol combination corresponding to a bonus role can be stopped on the reel 4 after a bonus role has been won, and after the game ends.

First, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when a game in which a special symbol combination can be stopped is executed, similar to the case where the Bonus 1 state described above occurs, variable display begins on reel 4 as a variable display means, and image variable display begins on image reels 40a to 40c on the main display 8.

Next, Figure 14 (b) shows the stopping state of reel 4 and the presentation image on the main display 8 when all reels 4 are stopped by the stop operation of stop button 5 and a special pattern combination corresponding to a bonus role stops on reel 4.
As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the 7 symbol 50 stops on each of the reels 4a to 4c as a special symbol combination at the end of the game, the image variation display of the image symbols on the main display 8 also stops, and the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b corresponding to the special symbol combination on the reel 4 also stops on the main display 8.

FIG. 14 shows a case where the BONUS 2 state occurs, and therefore the image pattern of "7-7-7" corresponding to the BONUS 2 state is stopped as the BONUS 2 symbol combination image 41b.
At this time, the image symbols of "7, 7, 7" are stopped individually in correspondence with the stopping of each of the reels 4a to 4c.
In addition, above the BONUS 2 symbol combination image 41b, a BONUS 2 notification image 41a consisting of text information of "BIG BONUS" is displayed to notify the occurrence of the BONUS 2 state.
In addition, in a game in which a special symbol combination can be stopped, if the special symbol combination is not stopped on reel 4 due to a player's mistake in stopping operation, etc., a losing symbol combination image different from the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b will be displayed.
The losing symbol combination may be any image other than the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b. For example, if the 7 symbol 50 cannot be stopped on only the right reel 4c, a losing symbol combination image of "7, 7, -" may be displayed.

The "7-7-7" in the Bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and the "Big Bonus" in the Bonus 2 notification image 41a generally refer to symbol combinations and their values that correspond to a highly advantageous bonus state among bonus states, so by announcing the Bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and the Bonus 2 notification image 41a, it is possible to make the player aware that a highly advantageous Bonus 2 state has occurred.

In this way, when a bonus state is generated, the main control device 10 determines whether to generate a bonus 1 state or a bonus 2 state, and if the bonus 2 state is generated, a bonus 2 pattern combination image 41b or a bonus 2 notification image 41a is displayed in response to the stopping of a special pattern combination on the reel 4, to notify the occurrence of the bonus 2 state.
Therefore, the player can play during the BONUS 2 state while being sure that the BONUS 2 state has occurred.

Then, when the next game is played, the game state transitions to the BONUS 2 state, the BONUS 2 symbol combination image 41b and the BONUS 2 notification image 41a on the main display 8 are erased, and an image during the BONUS 2 state, such as the number of remaining games in the first half of the BONUS 2 state (e.g., 25 times), is displayed.

It should be noted that, although the execution mode of the bonus state is indicated by executing an image changing display on the main display 8, the execution mode of the bonus state may also be indicated by other presentations on the main display 8, for example, the execution mode of the bonus state may be indicated by a roulette presentation or a battle presentation, etc.
In addition, after a special symbol combination is stopped on reel 4, a so-called reel effect may be executed in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped and re-moving reel 4, and the execution state of the bonus state may be notified by a symbol (e.g., "7" or "BAR") that has stopped on the pay line at the end of the reel effect.

In addition, when the occurrence of the Bonus 2 state is determined in advance, a Bonus 1 pattern combination image 40d or a Bonus 1 notification image 40e indicating the Bonus 1 state may be displayed, and then in a specified game executed in the first half, a so-called promotion effect may be executed in which a specified image indicating the Bonus 2 state is displayed.
As described above, the presentation at the start of the bonus 2 state in variant example 1 of the second embodiment is executed.

[Modification 2 of the second embodiment]
Next, a second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The slot machine 1 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, like variant example 1 of the second embodiment described above, makes it possible to change the duration of the first and second halves of the bonus state, and the content of the presentation executed in the second halves is different from that of variant example 1 described above.
Furthermore, in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, in addition to the Bonus 1 state in which the number of medals won is medium, and the Bonus 2 state in which the number of medals won is the maximum, it is also possible to generate a Bonus 3 state in which the duration of the first half of the bonus state is shortest and the number of medals won is the smallest.
Therefore, only the presentation executed in the latter half of the bonus state differs from variant 1 of the second embodiment, and the other configurations are the same as variant 1.

First, FIG. 15(a) is a diagram comparing the first and second halves of the bonus state in the BONUS 1 state in which the number of medals acquired is at a medium level, and the BONUS 2 state in which the number of medals acquired is at a maximum.
As shown in FIG. 15(a), in the second variant of the second embodiment, the main control device 10 is capable of selectively generating a bonus state between a BONUS 1 state and a BONUS 2 state based on the winning of the same bonus role.
However, the duration of the bonus state controlled by the main control device 10 is set to be the same for the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, and the period between the timings t11 and t13a shown in the figure is controlled as the bonus state.

In addition, the ratio of the first half to the second half is different between the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state, and the main control unit 10 changes the timing of switching between the first half and the second half so that, for example, in the Bonus 1 state, the first half ends when 20 games have been played from the start (timing t12a), whereas in the Bonus 2 state, the first half ends when 25 games have been played from the start (timing t12b).
Therefore, since the push order navigation during the bonus state is only executed in the first half as described above, the number of medals won is greater in the Bonus 2 state (large number of medals won) than in the Bonus 1 state (medium number of medals won) because the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set to be longer.

On the other hand, the latter half of the bonus state, in which the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed with a high probability, is set between timings t12a and t13a in the bonus 1 state, and between timings t12b and t13a in the bonus 2 state.
Therefore, the probability of transitioning to the AT state is higher in the BONUS 1 state than in the BONUS 2 state because the latter half of the state is set longer.

In addition, in the latter half of the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 2 state, similar to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, a high probability state presentation (high probability presentation) is executed to notify that the transition lottery to the AT state is being held in a high probability state.
Also, in the Bonus 2 state, the length of the first half is longer than the standard Bonus 1 state, so the end of the presentation during the high probability state is delayed by that amount (5 games) later than the actual end of the second half.

Specifically, in the Bonus 2 state, the presentation during the high probability state is executed between timings t12b and t13b, which is the period until the same number of games (20 games) are executed as those executed between timings t12a and t13a in the Bonus 1 state.
However, even in the Bonus 2 state, the latter half will end at timing t13a, so that the high probability state presentation will be carried out between timing t13a and t13b (extension period), but since the game has actually transitioned to the normal game state, the transition lottery to the AT state will be carried out in the normal probability state.

As with Variation 1 of the second embodiment described above, the advantage to the player is set to be higher the longer the first half, so even if the lottery period for the AT state is shortened, the bonus 2 state will be more advantageous than the bonus 1 state.

In addition, the selection of whether to generate the Bonus 1 state or the Bonus 2 state is controlled by the main control unit 10 when a bonus role is won, as in variant example 1 of the second embodiment described above, and when a predetermined condition is met and the lottery probability state of the AT state during the normal game state is a high probability state, the selection is controlled so that the probability of the Bonus 2 state being selected is higher than when it is in the normal probability state.
For example, when the normal probability state is established, the bonus 2 state is selected with a predetermined probability (e.g., 20%), whereas when the high probability state is established, the bonus 2 state is selected with a probability higher than the predetermined probability (e.g., 30%).

If the player does not win the lottery for transition to the AT state in the Bonus 2 state, the continuous presentation will end at the end of the extension period (timing t13b), and the presentation during the normal game state will be restored from the next game.
On the other hand, if the lottery for transition to the AT state is won in the Bonus 2 state, the continuous performance will end at the end of the extension period (timing t13b), and the game state will transition to the AT state from the next game.
Therefore, when the presentation during the high probability state is extended, the transition time to the AT state is also changed to a time later than the standard bonus state in response to the extension of the presentation.
In addition, when transitioning to the AT state, the transition to the AT state may be made at the end of the original bonus state (timing t13a).

Next, FIG. 15(b) is a diagram comparing the first and second halves of the bonus state in the BONUS 1 state in which the number of medals acquired is in the middle level and the BONUS 3 state in which the number of medals acquired is the smallest.
In the second modification of the second embodiment, the main control device 10 is capable of selectively generating a bonus 3 state in addition to the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state based on the winning of the same bonus role.
However, as described above, the duration of the bonus state controlled by the main control device 10 is set to be the same for the bonus 1 state, the bonus 2 state, and the bonus 3 state, and the period between the timings t11 and t13a shown in the figure is controlled as the bonus state.

As shown in Figure 15 (b), the ratio of the first half to the second half is different between the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 3 state, and the main control unit 10 changes the timing of switching between the first half and the second half so that, for example, in the Bonus 1 state, the first half ends when 20 games have been played from the start (timing t12a), whereas in the Bonus 3 state, the first half ends when 15 games have been played from the start (timing t12c).
Therefore, as mentioned above, the push order navigation during the bonus state is only executed in the first half, and because the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set to be shorter, the number of medals won is greater in the Bonus 1 state (medium number of medals won) than in the Bonus 3 state (small number of medals won).

On the other hand, the latter half of the bonus state, in which the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed with a high probability, is set between timings t12a and t13a in the bonus 1 state, and between timings t12c and t13a in the bonus 3 state.
Therefore, the probability of transitioning to the AT state is higher in the BONUS 3 state than in the BONUS 1 state because the latter half of the state is set longer.

In addition, in the latter half of the Bonus 1 state and the Bonus 3 state, similar to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, a high probability state presentation (high probability presentation) is executed to notify that the transition lottery to the AT state is being held in a high probability state.
Also, in the Bonus 3 state, the length of the first half is shorter than the standard Bonus 1 state, so that the time when the performance during the high probability state ends is brought forward by that amount (5 games) earlier than the time when the second half actually ends.

Specifically, in the Bonus 3 state, the presentation during the high probability state is executed between timings t12c and t13c, which is the period until the same number of games (20 games) are executed as those executed between timings t12a and t13a in the Bonus 1 state.
However, even in the bonus 3 state, the latter half will continue until timing t13a, so the high probability state presentation will not be performed between timing t13c and t13a (shortened section), but since the player is actually still in the latter half of the bonus state, the transition lottery to the AT state will be executed in the high probability state.

As with Variation 1 of the second embodiment described above, the advantage to the player is set to be higher the longer the first half, so the bonus 1 state is more advantageous than the bonus 3 state.

In addition, the selection of whether to generate the Bonus 1 state, Bonus 2 state, or Bonus 3 state is controlled by the main control unit 10 when a bonus role is won, as in variant example 1 of the second embodiment described above, and is controlled so that if a predetermined condition is met and the lottery probability state of the AT state during the normal game state is a high probability state, the probability of a more advantageous bonus state being selected is increased.
For example, when the probability state is normal, the bonus state is selected so that the relationship is Bonus 2 state (large number of coins acquired: large advantage) < Bonus 1 state (medium number of coins acquired: medium advantage) < Bonus 3 state (small number of coins acquired: small advantage), whereas when the probability state is high, the bonus state is selected so that the relationship is Bonus 3 state < Bonus 1 state < Bonus 2 state.

If the player does not win the lottery for transition to the AT state in the Bonus 3 state, the continuous presentation will end at the end of the shortened section (timing t13c), and the presentation during the normal game state will be restored from the next game.
However, since the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed with a high probability even in the shortened section, if the AT state is won in the shortened section, after the end of the game in which the original bonus state ends, a notification will be given that the AT state will be transitioned to without going through a continuous performance, and the game state will transition to the AT state from the next game.

On the other hand, if the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is won in the Bonus 3 state, the continuous presentation is executed so as to end at the end of the shortened section (timing t13c), and a transition to the AT state is announced after the end of the game in which the shortened section ends.The announcement then continues until the end of the original bonus state (timing t13a), and the game state transitions to the AT state from the next game.
That is, even when the game is shifted to the AT state, the shortened section is still in the bonus state, so the game is shifted to the AT state after waiting for the game to progress until the end of the original bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, even when a bonus state with a different execution mode occurs, the presentation is controlled so that the length of the latter half of the bonus state appears to be the same.
In other words, the sub-controller 20, as a presentation control means, has the function (means) of extending and executing the presentation corresponding to the latter half beyond the end point of the bonus state when the length of the latter half of the second period during the bonus state as a special gaming state is shortened compared to the standard specified bonus state (bonus 1 state).
On the other hand, when the length of the latter half of the second period during the bonus state as a special gaming state is extended beyond the standard specified bonus state (bonus 1 state), the device has a function (means) of shortening the presentation corresponding to the latter half beyond the end point of the bonus state.

Therefore, even if a bonus state occurs in which the length of the latter half is shortened or extended compared to the reference bonus state, the presentation during the high probability state will be executed for the same period as in the reference bonus state, and the transition lottery period to the AT state will not be shortened or lengthened for the player, which prevents the player from feeling distrustful or having a decrease in expectations.
Furthermore, even if the performance during the high probability state is extended or shortened, the actual lottery period for transition to the AT state is not always set to a fixed period, so it is possible to prevent situations in which the balance of benefits between gaming establishments and players is disrupted.

The period (number of games) for which the latter half is shortened or extended may be other than those mentioned above, and the bonus states with different periods in the latter half may be four or more types other than the three types mentioned above. In this case, an extended or shortened section of the high probability state presentation may be set for the period by which the latter half is shortened or extended.

In addition, multiple bonus roles may be provided, and the length of the entire period of the bonus state may be set to be different for each bonus role, and the ratio of the first half to the second half of the bonus state generated by the winning of the same bonus role may be made to differ.
Furthermore, when information indicating a bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18, it is preferable not to output the information in the above-mentioned extension section and shortened section.

In addition, when the bonus state is ended by the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (prescribed number of medals), the bonus state is actually ended by paying out the same prescribed number of medals for each bonus state, but from the outside, the prescribed number of medals is changed for each type of bonus state, and the performance during the high probability state is executed according to the changed prescribed number of medals.

Next, referring to FIG. 16, a case will be described where the execution mode of the push order navigation in the first half is changed in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment variant example 2.
In the slot machine 1 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, it is possible to generate Bonus 1 state to Bonus 3 state, the first half of which has different lengths, but the specified period in the first half of these bonus states may be a section in which push order navigation is not executed, as shown in Figure 16.

First, Figure 16 (a) shows a case in which, in a slot machine 1 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, a section without push order navigation is provided in which push order navigation is disabled during a specified period in the middle of the first half of a specified bonus state (e.g., bonus 2 state) under the control of the main control unit 10.
The no push order navigation section is set during which a predetermined number of games (for example, 1 to 2 games) are played.

As shown in Figure 16 (a), the first half is the period up to the point (timing t16) when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 25 games) have been played in the entire Bonus 2 state (timings t14 to t17), and in this first half, the push order navigation is basically executed when the push order bell role is won.
Then, a predetermined period in the middle of the first half (timing t15a to t15b) is set as a section without push order navigation in which push order navigation is not executed.
Therefore, during this section without push order navigation, even if you win the push order bell role, push order navigation will not be executed.

The section without push order navigation is set based on the point at which the first half of each bonus state ends. For example, in the first half of Bonus 2 state, the section without push order navigation is set at either the point at which the first half of Bonus 3 state ends (when 15 games have been played) or the point at which the first half of Bonus 1 state ends (when 20 games have been played), or both.
Therefore, the start point (timing t15a) of the section without push order navigation shown in Figure 16 (a) is the end point of the first half of the Bonus 3 state (the end point when 15 games have been played) or the end point of the first half of the Bonus 1 state (the end point when 20 games have been played).

In addition, in the section without push order navigation, the sub-controller 20 controls, for example, the main display 8 to execute a continuation decision display as to whether or not the first half of the bonus state will continue.
The continuation decision effect is executed, for example, by a roulette game, and if the roulette game results in a continuation, the first half of the game will continue, and if the roulette game results in a non-continuation (end), the first half of the game will end without continuing and a transition will occur to the second half.
In addition, if a section without push order navigation is provided in the middle of the first half, the type of bonus state (the length of the first half) must not be announced at the start of the bonus state.

The result of the continuation decision presentation is determined according to the type of bonus state being executed at that time, and as shown in Figure 16 (a), in the case of the bonus 2 state, at the end of the section without push order navigation (timing t15b), the result is derived that the first half will continue, and the state will return to one in which push order navigation is executed again from the next game.
On the other hand, at the end of the first half of the BONUS 1 state and at the end of the first half of the BONUS 3 state, the continuation decision performance is executed, and the result that the first half ends is derived, and the latter half continues without returning to the state where the push order navigation is executed. Therefore, in this case, in the BONUS 1 state and the BONUS 3 state, the continuation decision performance is executed in the latter half.

As described above, a section without push order navigation is provided during a predetermined period in the middle of the first half of the bonus state, and the continuation decision effect is executed during this section without push order navigation, and the push order navigation is reactivated according to the result of the continuation decision effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, it is possible to increase the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of the player compared to when the length of the first half of the bonus state is notified at the beginning.
Furthermore, even if the push order bell role is won during the continuation decision performance, the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to concentrate on the continuation decision performance due to their eyes being fixed on the push order navigation, and therefore is unable to accurately determine whether or not the game will continue.

In addition, for example, even at the beginning of the second half of the bonus 1 state or bonus 3 state, a continuation decision effect is executed that leads to the end of the first half, so even if the first half ends, it is possible to extend the player's anticipation and increase the interest of the game.

The section without push order navigation can be any period during which the continuation decision effect can be executed, and the continuation decision effect can be any effect that can inform the player whether or not the first half will continue.

Next, Figure 16 (b) shows a case in which, in a slot machine 1 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, under the control of the main control unit 10, a section without push order navigation is provided in which push order navigation is disabled during an initial specified period in the first half of a specified bonus state (e.g., bonus 2 state).
As described above, the section without push order navigation is set during which a predetermined number of games (for example, 1 to 2 games) are played.

As shown in Figure 16 (b), the first half is the period up to the point (timing t16) when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 25 games) have been played in the entire Bonus 2 state (timings t14 to t17), and in this first half, the push order navigation is basically executed when the push order bell role is won.
Then, during a predetermined period at the beginning of the first half (timing t14 to t15c), a section without push order navigation is set in which push order navigation is not executed.
Therefore, during this section without push order navigation, even if you win the push order bell role, push order navigation will not be executed.

The section without push order navigation is set at the beginning of the first half of all bonus states, and in the section without push order navigation, under the control of the sub-control device 20, for example, a first half determination performance is executed on the main display 8 to determine the duration (length) of the first half of the bonus state.
The first half determination effect is executed, for example, by a roulette game, and the duration of the first half of the current bonus state is derived by the roulette game. Therefore, the type of the current bonus state is notified by the roulette game.

The result of the first half determination performance is determined according to the type of bonus state being executed at that time, and as shown in Figure 16 (b), in the case of the Bonus 2 state, at the end of the section without push order navigation (timing t15c), the duration of the first half (25 games) is announced by the roulette game, and the state transitions to one in which push order navigation is executed from the next game.
On the other hand, in the Bonus 1 and Bonus 3 states, the first half determination performance is executed in the initial section without push order navigation in the first half, and the duration of each first half is announced.

As described above, a section without push order navigation is provided in a predetermined period at the beginning of the first half of the bonus state, and the first half determination performance is executed in this section without push order navigation, and the duration of the first half is notified according to the result of the first half determination performance, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment value of the game. Also, since the duration is reliably notified at the beginning of the first half, the player can proceed with the game while accurately recognizing the type of the current bonus state.
Furthermore, even if the push order bell role is won during the first half determination performance, the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is unable to concentrate on the first half determination performance due to their eyes being fixed on the push order navigation, and therefore is unable to accurately recognize the duration of the first half.

In addition, the section without push order navigation may be any period during which the first half determination performance can be executed, and the first half determination performance may be any performance that can inform the player of the duration of the first half.
The slot machine 1 according to the second modification of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

[Modification 3 of the second embodiment]
Next, a third modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 in the second embodiment described above, if the lottery for transition to the AT state is won in the latter half of the bonus state, the transition to the AT state is made after the bonus state ends.
Therefore, even if the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the AT state, the push order navigation will not be executed until the entire latter half of the bonus state, in which the push order navigation is not executed, has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 in variant example 3 of the second embodiment, if the AT state transition lottery is won in the latter half of the bonus state, the push order navigation is executed without waiting for the end of the bonus state.
Therefore, the manner in which the push order navigation is executed when the transition lottery to the AT state is won in the latter half of the bonus state differs from that of the second embodiment described above, but the other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment.

Figure 17 is a timing chart showing the navigation state and presentation state when a specified bonus state (e.g., Bonus 1 state) occurs, a specified rare role (e.g., Chance role) is won in the latter half, and the winning of the role also triggers the lottery for transition to the AT state.
As shown in Figure 17, when the bonus state occurs and the first half period (timing t18 to t19) during which the push order navigation is activated ends, the next game transitions to the second half and the push order navigation is deactivated.

Then, when a specified rare role is won at the time when a specified game is executed in the second half (timing t20), and the lottery for transitioning to the AT state is also won at that time, a continuous presentation is executed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-control unit 20 to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
The continuous performance is executed for a predetermined number of games (e.g., three games), and after the final game of the continuous performance ends, a result is derived notifying the player of a transition to an AT state, and a fake AT state is initiated under the control of the main control device from the start of the next game (timing t21).

The fake AT state is a state that makes it appear as if an AT state is occurring during the latter half of the bonus state, and like the normal AT state, the push order navigation is activated and the main display 8 also displays the same effects as in the normal AT state.
Therefore, although the actual gaming state is in the latter half of the bonus state, from the player's perspective, it feels as if the game has transitioned to an AT state from the end of the continuous performance (timing t21).

Then, from the point when the actual bonus state ends and the next game starts (timing t22), the game state transitions to the AT state (main AT state). However, since the fake AT state has already occurred at this point, the game state transitions to the main AT state when the fake AT state ends.
In addition, when the fake AT state ends and the player transitions to the actual AT state, the push order navigation and the presentation on the main display 8 continue, so that from the outside it appears as if a series of AT states are occurring during this time.

In addition, the duration of the fake AT state (timing t21 to t22) is set regardless of the specified number of games (duration) of the AT state (real AT state), so that a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player is extended by the duration of the fake AT state.
In other words, the earlier the fake AT state occurs in the bonus state, the longer the duration of the specific game state will be, and the greater the advantage to the player.
In addition, at the start of the fake AT state, it is preferable to announce the number of games by which the specific game state will be extended, and it is also preferable to set the number of remaining games in the AT state on the main display 8 to a value obtained by adding the number of games by which the specific game state will be extended.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 in variant example 3 of the second embodiment, if the player wins the lottery to transition to the AT state in the latter half of the bonus state, a fake AT state that looks like an AT state is generated in the middle of the latter half, so that the AT state can be generated without any sense of incongruity.
In addition, when a fake AT state occurs, the period during which the player has an advantage is extended accordingly, which can heighten the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, even if a rare role is won in the latter half of the bonus state but the lottery for transition to the AT state is not won, a continuous presentation may be executed to finally inform the player that there will be no transition to the fake AT state.
In addition, even if a rare combination is won in the latter half of the bonus state and the AT state transition lottery is also won, a pattern may be set in which the state is not transitioned to the fake AT state. In this case, as in the second embodiment described above, a continuous performance is executed at the final stage of the bonus state, and the state is transitioned to the AT state after the end of this continuous performance, i.e., after the end of the bonus state.

In addition, when a pattern that does not transition to the fake AT state is set, a distribution lottery may be held when a rare role is won to determine whether to generate a fake AT state or to transition to the AT state after the bonus state ends.
In addition, if a rare combination is won in the latter half of the bonus state, a waiting period may be set or a premonition effect may be executed.
The slot machine 1 according to the third modified example of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment of the present invention, only a part of the configuration and control of the slot machine 1 differs from that of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the first embodiment, so below only the parts that differ from the first embodiment described above will be explained.

[Game flow regarding bonus state and RT state in the gaming machine in the third embodiment]
First, the flow of the game regarding the bonus state and the RT state in the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, it is possible to play a two-bet game in which two medals are spent to play the game, and a three-bet game in which three medals are spent to play the game. Figure 18 shows the flow of play when playing a two-bet game and a three-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 18, the main control device 10 can control three gaming states when a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are executed: a non-RT state (RT0), an RT state (RT1), and a bonus state.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, can be generated, but the bonus state is set to a bonus A state and a bonus B state, with the bonus A state only occurring in a two-bet game and the bonus B state only occurring in a three-bet game.

The non-RT state (RT0) is a non-RT (non-replay time) gaming state in which a replay winning state is executed with normal probability, and the slot machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-RT state in its initial state.
When a 2-bet game is played in a non-RT state (RT0), a bonus A role is drawn with a predetermined probability, and when a 3-bet game is played, a bonus B role is drawn with a predetermined probability. If the bonus A role is won, the winning state of the bonus A role is maintained, and if the bonus B role is won, the winning state of the bonus B role is maintained, and the game state transitions to the RT state (RT1) (arrow a2 in Figure 18 (a)).

The RT state (RT1) is a game state of RT (replay time) in which the winning state of the replay role is executed with high probability, and while the winning state of the bonus role is maintained, the game state is controlled to the RT state (RT1).
When a 2-bet game is played during the RT state (RT1) in which the winning state of the Bonus A role is maintained, a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., "red 7, white 7, blue 7") that will result in the Bonus A role being awarded becomes possible, and when a 3-bet game is played during the RT state (RT1) in which the winning state of the Bonus B role is maintained, a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., "red 7, blue 7, white 7") that will result in the Bonus B role being awarded becomes possible, and when the predetermined symbol combination stops on reel 4, the game state transitions to the bonus state (arrow a3 in Figure 18(a)).

The bonus state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the chances of winning a specific role (for example, a bell role) are higher than in the non-RT state.
Then, when a game is played during the bonus state, if a predetermined condition for ending the bonus state is met (for example, either a specified combination is won eight times or 12 games are played), the game state transitions to a non-RT state (arrow a1 in Figure 18(a)).
In addition, the three game states of non-RT state (RT0), RT state (RT1), and bonus state are transitioned only in two bet games for the bonus A role, and transitioned only in three bet games for the bonus B role.
Therefore, for example, if a bonus A role is won in a two-bet game, transition to the RT state occurs, and then a three-bet game is played, the game state transition process is not performed, the three-bet game is played while the RT state is maintained, and a bonus lottery, which will be described later, is executed.
As described above, the control of the gaming state relating to the bonus state and the RT state is executed in the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment.

[Flow of a 3-bet game on the gaming machine in the third embodiment]
Next, the flow of a game in a three-bet game on the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment is capable of playing a two-bet game in which two medals are spent to play the game, and a three-bet game in which three medals are spent to play the game. FIG. 19 shows the flow of play when playing a three-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 19, the 3-bet game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is executed in one of multiple game states, namely, the normal game state, the CZ state, the pseudo bonus state, and the AT state, as in the first embodiment described above. The main control device 10 is capable of controlling the transition from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

The pseudo bonus state is set to a blue 7 pseudo bonus state having a duration of 20 games and a red 7 pseudo bonus state having a duration of 30 games, and the game is controlled to one of the pseudo bonus states.
In the AT state, a specialized zone is set, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state, control in the specialized zone is possible for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, since the 3-bet game is a game that involves transitions between four game states, namely, the normal game state, the CZ state, the pseudo bonus state, and the AT state, when a 3-bet game is executed, the transition processing between the three game states, namely, the non-RT state (RT0), the RT state (RT1), and the bonus state, that are involved in a 2-bet game is not performed, and the game state at that time is maintained.
Therefore, for example, if a 3-bet game is executed during the RT state in which the winning state of the bonus A role is maintained, a transition from the normal game state to the CZ state, from the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state, etc. is made while the RT state is maintained.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, transition control is performed between the normal zone, which is an area where the push order navigation described above cannot be performed, and the advantageous zone, which is an area where the push order navigation can be performed, based on the execution of the 3-bet game. In the initial state of the slot machine 1, it is controlled to the normal zone, and when a 3-bet game is executed in the normal zone, if a predetermined transition condition is met (for example, a winning combination is achieved), a transition to the advantageous zone is performed.

In addition, during the advantageous period, a transition to the normal period occurs at the end of a CZ state that does not transition to a pseudo-bonus state, at part of the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not transition to an AT state, and at the end of the AT state.
Also, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a limiting means (so-called limiter) is provided for limiting the number of medals that can be won during the advantageous zone.
In addition, the transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone may be other than as described above, and the transition to the normal zone may be made at the end of all pseudo-bonus states, or the advantageous zone may be continued for part of the end of the CZ state and part of the end of the AT state.

(Normal gameplay state)
The normal gaming state in this third embodiment is the gaming state in which the player remains when the main control device 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, as in the first embodiment described above, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
By playing a three-bet game (hereafter referred to as the game) during the normal game state, a lottery is held to transition to the pseudo-bonus state when a predetermined role (e.g., a rare role) is won, and a transition from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state occurs with a predetermined probability (arrow a2 in Figure 19).
In addition, when the number of times a game is executed during the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number (ceiling game number), a transition from the normal gaming state to the pseudo bonus state is also made (arrow a2 in FIG. 19).

Similarly, when a game is played during the normal game state, a lottery is held to transition to the CZ state when a specified role (e.g., a rare role) is won, and a transition from the normal game state to the CZ state occurs with a specified probability (arrow c2 in Figure 19).
Similarly, when a game is played during the normal gaming state, a lottery is held to transition to the AT state when a predetermined role (e.g., a rare role) is won, and a transition from the normal gaming state to the AT state occurs with a predetermined probability (arrow g2 in Figure 19).

As will be described in more detail later, the probability of transitioning from the normal game state to the pseudo bonus state, CZ state, and AT state is set to a different value for each lottery trigger role, so that the difficulty of transitioning to each game state is different.
In addition, a normal probability state and a high probability state are set in the normal game state, and in each game, the probability of transition to the pseudo bonus state, CZ state, and AT state is controlled so that the high probability state is higher than the normal probability state.

Also, as will be described in more detail later, during a game in the normal game state, a pseudo game is executed based on the fulfillment of certain conditions, and a lottery is also held to transition to the above-mentioned special benefits (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state) based on the pseudo game.
In addition, the high probability state is also reflected in the pseudo game, and control is performed to increase the awarding of benefits in the pseudo game as well.
Also, similar to the first embodiment described above, when a transition to a pseudo bonus state, a CZ state, or an AT state is decided, a waiting period may be set before the transition to each game state, or a premonition effect or a continuous effect (battle effect) may be executed on the main display unit 8.

(CZ state)
The CZ state in this third embodiment, like the first embodiment described above, is a gaming state in which a lottery process for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is carried out with a higher probability in each game (3-bet game) than in the normal gaming state, making it easier to transition to the pseudo-bonus state than while remaining in the normal gaming state.
During the CZ state, push order navigation is performed when the push order bell role is won, but push order navigation may be chosen not to be performed during the CZ state.

In addition, the CZ state continues for 5 to 15 games, and if the conditions for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state are met during that time, the game state transitions from the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state (arrow e2 in Figure 19).
On the other hand, if the condition for transitioning to the pseudo bonus state is not met during the CZ state and the specified number of games has been played, the game state transitions from the CZ state to the normal game state (arrow d2 in Figure 19).

(pseudo bonus state)
The pseudo bonus state in this third embodiment is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is executed as a notification of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the pseudo bonus state.
The pseudo bonus state is further set to a blue 7 pseudo bonus state and a red 7 pseudo bonus state, which have different durations (number of games), with the specified number of games set to 20 games in the blue 7 pseudo bonus state and 30 games in the red 7 pseudo bonus state.

When the pseudo bonus state is entered, a pseudo game is executed in the first game, and when the reel 4 is stopped by the player operating the stop button 5 as a stop operation means during the pseudo game, the symbol combination "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" always stops on a specified line in the display window 6 when entering the Red 7 pseudo bonus state, and the symbol combination "Blue 7, Blue 7, Blue 7" always stops on a specified line in the display window 6 when entering the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a reel presentation is executed to notify the transition to each pseudo bonus state.

Then, by operating the start lever 3 again, the first game in each pseudo bonus state is resumed.
Therefore, the symbol combinations of "red 7, red 7, red 7" and "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" are symbol combinations that indicate the confirmation or transition of one of the pseudo bonus states.

Then, as will be described in more detail later, a lottery is held to transition to the AT state based on the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, the game state transitions to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends (arrow f2 in Figure 19), and if the AT state transition lottery is not won, the game state transitions to the normal game state after the pseudo-bonus state ends (arrow b2 in Figure 19).
In addition, the pseudo bonus state may be ended when the number of medals paid out during the pseudo bonus state (including missed medals) reaches a predetermined number, other than when a specified number of games have been played.

(AT state)
The AT state in this third embodiment is a game state in which it is easy to win medals, as push order navigation for the push order bell role is performed to notify the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the game in the AT state.
During the AT state, a predetermined number of games (e.g., 50 games) granted at the time of the initial transition to the AT state is managed as the remaining number of games that can continue the AT state, and the remaining number of games is subtracted each time a game is played, and the AT state continues until there are no remaining games.
Then, when there are no more remaining games in the AT state, the AT state ends and the gaming state transitions from the CZ state to the normal gaming state (arrow h2 in Figure 19).

In addition, when the AT state is entered, a pseudo game is executed in the first game, and when the player operates the stop button 5 during the pseudo game to stop the reel 4, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" always stops pseudo on a specified line in the display window 6, and a reel presentation is executed to notify the entry into the AT state.
Then, by operating the start lever 3 again, the first game in the AT state is resumed.
Therefore, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is a symbol combination that notifies the confirmation or transition to the AT state.

In addition, even in a game during the AT state, a lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state is carried out, and if the conditions for transition to the pseudo bonus state are met, the AT state is temporarily interrupted and the game state is transitioned to the pseudo bonus state (arrow i2 in Figure 19).
In addition, when the AT state transitions to the pseudo bonus state, the game state will return to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends (arrow f2 in Figure 19), and the AT state will resume from the point where it was interrupted.

Furthermore, in this third embodiment, if certain conditions are met in a game during the AT state, a specialized zone is generated for a predetermined period (5 to 15 games), and a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed during this specialized zone.
During the specialized zone, push order navigation is performed when the push order bell role is won, but push order navigation may be chosen not to be performed during the specialized zone.
As described above, the gaming state during execution of a 3-bet game in the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is controlled.

[Lottery table used for hand awards and hand lottery in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the payout for a winning combination and the lottery for a winning combination in the main control device in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

The roles in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment are comprised of a small role, a replay role, and a bonus role. The small roles include a push order bell role, a common bell role, and a watermelon role, and the bonus roles include a bonus A role and a bonus B role. The replay role also includes a cherry role.

As in the first embodiment described above, the push order bell role has six push order bell roles 1 to 6 in which the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in one push order (a specific push order) out of six possible push orders (for example, "5a → 5b → 5c", "5c → 5b → 5a", etc.) and the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, the common bell role is a role in which the corresponding symbol combination ("Bell Bell Bell") stops on an active line regardless of the press order.
In addition, the push order bell role and the common bell role are configured so that the push order bell role does not require any eye-pressing on all reels 4.

In addition, when the push order bell role is won, regardless of which stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the first stop button 5 is operated in a specific push order, the reel 4 may be controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the push order bell role stops. In addition, the push order bell is not limited to six patterns, and three push order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
When the push order bell role is won by a specific push order, and when the common bell role is won, 6 medals are paid out in a 2 bet game and 10 medals are paid out in a 3 bet game, as shown in Fig. 20(a). Also, when the push order bell role is won by a push order other than the specific push order (a spill), 1 medal is paid out in both the 2 bet game and the 3 bet game.

The replay role is a small role in which the winning symbol combination is "Replay, Replay, Replay," and is configured so that it does not require eye-pressing on all reels 4.
When a replay combination is won, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the player is allowed to play (replay) the next game with the same number of bets.

The watermelon role is a minor role in which the winning symbol combination is “watermelon, watermelon, watermelon”, and is a so-called rare role that requires the player to press the “watermelon” symbol on any of the reels 4.
When the watermelon role is won, as shown in FIG. 20(a), two medals are paid out in a two-bet game, and three medals are paid out in a three-bet game.
The Cherry role is a role in which the winning symbol combination is "Cherry Replay Replay," and is a so-called rare role that requires the player to press and hold the "Cherry" symbol on any of the left reels 4a.
Since the cherry role is set as a kind of replay role, as shown in FIG. 20(a), it is possible to play (replay) the next game with the same number of bets as in the replay role.

The bonus role is a role that changes the game state to the bonus state when won. There are two types of bonus roles: a bonus A role that can be won only in a two-bet game and is controlled to allow the symbol combination of "red 7, white 7, blue 7" on an active line when won; and a bonus B role that can be won only in a three-bet game and is controlled to allow the symbol combination of "red 7, blue 7, white 7" on an active line when won.
Furthermore, when each bonus role is won, no medals are paid out, and the right to win each bonus role is maintained (carried over) until the corresponding bonus role is won.

The effective lines may be all the lines in the display window 6, or only the middle lines may be set as the effective lines. Also, the upper right line may be set as the effective line, and when the above-mentioned symbol combination stops on the other lines, the symbol combination that stops on the upper right line may be determined to be the winning symbol combination.

Next, the winning probability of each winning combination in a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be described with reference to FIGS.
Note that Figures 20 (b) and (c) both show the case where the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1.

First, FIG. 20(b) shows the probability of winning each role when a two-bet game is played in each of the following states: when the bonus role is not carried over (non-RT state), when the bonus role is carried over (RT state), and in the bonus state.
The selection of each role is performed by the main control unit 10 by drawing random numbers for role selection. In Figures 20(b) and (c), the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is 65,535, and the number of winning values (winners) out of that is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), when a two-bet game is being played, each of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is drawn with a probability of 7280/65535 both when no bonus role is carried over and when a bonus role is carried over, and with a probability of 10/65535 during the bonus state.

In addition, when playing a two-bet game, the common bell role is drawn with a probability of 1760/65535 both when the bonus role is not carried over and when the bonus role is carried over, and with a probability of 10/65535 during the bonus state.

When playing a two-bet game, the watermelon symbol is drawn with a probability of 1000/65535 both when the bonus symbol is not carried over and when the bonus symbol is carried over, and with a probability of 55446/65535 during the bonus state.

In addition, when a two-bet game is being played, the cherry role is drawn with a probability of 1200/65535 when no bonus role is carried over, with a probability of 1500/65535 when a bonus role is carried over, and with a probability of 10/65535 during the bonus state.

In addition, when a two-bet game is being played, the bonus A role is drawn with a probability of 6553/65535 while the bonus role is not carried over, and with a probability of 0/65535 (no win) while the bonus role is carried over and during the bonus state.
On the other hand, the bonus B role is drawn with a probability of 0/65535 (no win) when the bonus role is not carried over, when the bonus role is carried over, and during the bonus state.
Therefore, in the two-bet game, only the bonus A role can be won.

In addition, when a two-bet game is being played, the replay role is drawn with a probability of 8870/65535 when no bonus role is carried over, with a probability of 9070/65535 when a bonus role is carried over, and with a probability of 10/65535 during the bonus state.

In addition, when playing a two-bet game, the probability of a miss that does not win any of the above roles is 2473/65535 when the bonus role is not carried over, 8526/65535 when the bonus role is carried over, and 10000/65535 during the bonus state.

Next, FIG. 20(c) shows the probability of winning each role when a 3-bet game is being played when the bonus role is not carried over, when the bonus role is carried over, and during the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when a 3-bet game is being played, the probability of each of the push order bell symbols 1 to 6, the common bell symbol, the watermelon symbol, the cherry symbol, the replay symbol, and the miss symbol is the same as when a 2-bet game is being played, so a description of them will be omitted here.

In addition, when a 3-bet game is being played, the bonus A role is drawn with a probability of 0/65535 (no win) when the bonus role is not carried over, when the bonus role is carried over, and during the bonus state.
On the other hand, the bonus B role is drawn with a probability of 6553/65535 while the bonus role is not carried over, and with a probability of 0/65535 (no win) while the bonus role is carried over and during the bonus state.
Therefore, in the 3-bet game, only the bonus B role can be won.

With the above-mentioned probabilities, the lottery for each role is performed when the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game are executed during the non-carryover of the bonus role (non-RT state), during the carryover of the bonus role (RT state), and during the bonus state. Therefore, the probability of winning the replay role is higher when the bonus role is carried over than when the bonus role is not carried over.
In addition, the probability of winning the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is relatively high when the bonus role is not carried over and when the bonus role is carried over.

Therefore, for example, if a three-bet game is played during the carryover of a bonus role, which is likely to result in a pseudo-bonus state or an AT state, there is a relatively high probability of winning a replay role, and furthermore, if push order navigation is performed during the pseudo-bonus state or an AT state, the number of medals will increase at a predetermined rate.

In addition, the higher the setting value in the probability setting device 14, the lower the probability of winning the replay role and the higher the probability of winning the cherry role, or the winning probability of each role may be made the same for all setting values in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, the probability of winning each role for each game state is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning other than the common bell role and the losing role (losing) during the bonus state may be the same as during the non-bonus state, and the probability of winning the common bell role during the bonus state may be higher and the probability of winning the losing role (losing) during the non-bonus state may be lower.
As described above, the payout of winning combinations and the drawing of winning combinations are realized by the main control device in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Reel arrangement in the third embodiment]
Next, the arrangement of the reels 4, which are exemplified as the variable display means, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The reel 4 is composed of a left reel 4a, a center reel 4b, and a right reel 4c, as in the first embodiment described above, and each of the reels 4a to 4c shows a plurality of (20) symbols related to winning combinations and transitions in game states, with the arrangement of the symbols being different for each reel.

First, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the left reel 4a displays, in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19, "Replay", "Bell", "Blue 7", "Red 7", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell", "White 7", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell", "BAR", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell", "Blank", "Bell", and "Watermelon".

As shown in FIG. 21(b), the middle reel 4b displays, in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19, "Blank", "Watermelon", "Blue 7", "Bell", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Red 7", "Bell", "Replay", "White 7", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Bell", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "BAR", "Bell", and "Replay".

As shown in FIG. 21(c), the right reel 4c displays the following symbols in the order of sequence numbers 0 to 19: "Watermelon", "Red 7", "Blue 7", "Bell", "Replay", "BAR", "Replay", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "White 7", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Blank", "Bell", and "Replay".

Since the symbols are arranged as described above, the spacing between the "bell" and "replay" symbols is within the reel-in range (4 frames) for the symbol stop control, and there is no need to aim for the "bell" and "replay" symbols. On the other hand, the spacing between the "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "cherry", and "watermelon" symbols is larger than the reel-in range for the symbol stop control on a given reel 4, and therefore requires aiming for the corresponding symbols on the winning line.
The symbol arrangement of the reel 4 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is set as described above.

[Lottery table used when determining the ceiling game number in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a description will be given of the lottery for determining the ceiling game number when a 3-bet game is executed in the normal gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.
When a condition for transition to an advantageous zone is met (e.g., a specified bell role is won) during a normal zone in a normal gaming state, the main control device 10 selects the ceiling number of games to be played in the subsequent normal gaming state.

When the number of three bet games in the normal game state reaches the ceiling game number selected, a special benefit such as a pseudo bonus state or an AT state is awarded.
Therefore, the pseudo bonus state and AT state occur not only when a transition lottery is won when a specified role (e.g., a rare role) is won during the normal game state, but also when the number of games played reaches the ceiling game number.

The main control device 10 also determines the ceiling game number from among four options: 128 games, 256 games, 512 games, and 768 games. When selecting the ceiling game number, the selection control is performed based on the type of hand that has established the favorable zone transition condition and the setting value in the probability setting device 14.

Figure 22 shows an internal lottery table used to draw the ceiling number of games when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.
The ceiling number of games is selected by the main control unit 10 by selecting random numbers for the ceiling number of games. In Figure 22, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers that will be obtained when each ceiling number of games is selected is shown.

First, FIG. 22(a) shows a case where a role other than a rare role (for example, a push order bell role) is won when the advantageous zone transition condition is met.
As shown in Figure 22 (a), when a role other than a rare role is won and the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, 128 games will be selected as the ceiling game number with a probability of 48/256, 256 games will be selected with a probability of 16/256, 512 games will be selected with a probability of 64/256, and 768 games will be selected with a probability of 128/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, there is a 32/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 96/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 96/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 32/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, there is a 64/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 16/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 48/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 128/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, there is a 32/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 128/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 64/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 32/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, there is a 76/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 32/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 64/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 84/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 6, there is a 32/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 160/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 48/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 16/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Next, FIG. 22(b) shows a case where a rare role (e.g., a cherry role) is won when the advantageous zone transition condition is met.
As shown in Figure 22 (b), when a rare role is won and the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, 128 games will be selected as the ceiling game number with a probability of 192/256, 256 games will be selected with a probability of 64/256, 512 games will be selected with a probability of 0/256, and 768 games will be selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, 128 games are selected as the ceiling game number with a probability of 128/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 128/256, 512 games are selected with a probability of 0/256, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, there is a probability of 192/256 that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a probability of 64/256 that 256 games will be selected, a probability of 0/256 that 512 games will be selected, and a probability of 0/256 that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, there is a 128/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, there is a 128/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, there is a 0/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and there is a 0/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, there is a 192/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 64/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 0/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 0/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 6, there is a 128/256 probability that 128 games will be selected as the ceiling number of games, a 128/256 probability that 256 games will be selected, a 0/256 probability that 512 games will be selected, and a 0/256 probability that 768 games will be selected.

Since the ceiling game number is determined as described above, when the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met by winning a rare role, there is a higher probability that a smaller ceiling game number will be selected than when a role other than a rare role is won, and further, when a rare role is won, a relatively large number of games such as 512 games or 768 games will not be selected.
Furthermore, the higher the setting value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that a smaller ceiling game number will be selected.
As described above, the lottery for the ceiling number of games is executed in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used to determine the prize when the ceiling number of games is reached in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 23, the lottery for the bonus to be awarded when the ceiling number of games is reached will be described.

The main control device 10 is designed to award a bonus when the number of three bet games in the normal game state reaches a preset ceiling number of games. The bonuses that can be awarded at this time are set to a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and an AT state, and one of these bonuses is selected to be awarded.

In addition, when determining the bonus to be awarded when the ceiling game number is reached, the main control device 10 performs selection control based on the type of hand that has established the advantageous zone transition condition and the determined ceiling game number.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table used to select bonuses when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone.
The prize lottery is conducted by the main control unit 10 by drawing random numbers for the prize lottery. In FIG. 23, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is 256, and the number of random numbers required to win each prize is shown.
In addition, the time for drawing the prize lottery may be when the player moves from the normal zone to the advantageous zone (at the start of the game), or when the ceiling number of games is reached.

First, FIG. 23(a) shows a case where a role other than a rare role (for example, a push order bell role) is won when the advantageous zone transition condition is met.
As shown in Figure 23 (a), when a role other than a rare role is won and the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, and 128 times is selected as the ceiling number of games, the red 7 pseudo bonus state is selected with a probability of 216/256, the blue 7 pseudo bonus state is selected with a probability of 32/256, and the AT state is selected with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, if 256 games is selected as the ceiling number of games, there is a 192/256 probability that the red 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, a 48/256 probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, and a 16/256 probability that the AT state will be selected.

Similarly, if 512 is selected as the ceiling number of games, there is a 128/256 probability that the red 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, a 104/256 probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, and a 24/256 probability that the AT state will be selected.

Similarly, if 768 times is selected as the ceiling number of games, there is a 64/256 probability that the red 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, a 160/256 probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, and a 32/256 probability that the AT state will be selected.

Next, Figure 23 (b) shows a case where a rare role (for example, a cherry role) is won when the advantageous zone transition condition is established. Note that when a rare role is won, the ceiling game number of 512 times and 768 times is not selected, so only the ceiling game number of 128 times and 256 times are items.
As shown in Figure 23 (b), when a rare role is won and the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met, and 128 times is selected as the ceiling number of games, the red 7 pseudo bonus state is selected with a probability of 96/256, the blue 7 pseudo bonus state is selected with a probability of 96/256, and the AT state is selected with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, if 256 games is selected as the ceiling number of games, there is an 86/256 probability that the red 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, an 85/256 probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be selected, and an 85/256 probability that the AT state will be selected.

Since the bonus awarded when the ceiling game number is reached is determined as described above, the higher the ceiling number that is determined, the higher the probability that the red 7 pseudo bonus state → blue 7 pseudo bonus state → AT state will be selected in that order.
As will be described in more detail later, the degree of advantage given to the player increases in the order of red 7 pseudo bonus state → blue 7 pseudo bonus state → AT state, so the higher the ceiling number that is determined, the more advantageous the bonus that will be selected.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the advantageous zone are met by winning a rare role, the probability of a more advantageous bonus being selected is higher than when a role other than a rare role is won.
As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a lottery for a bonus is executed when the ceiling number of games is reached.

Next, a pseudo game as a second game, which is a characteristic feature of the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment, will be described.
In the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment, under the control of the main control device 10, it is possible to form a game execution mode in which multiple game results are derived in one game.

Specifically, in a normal game as the first game, the reel 4 is rotated by operating the start lever 3, and the reel 4 is stopped by operating the stop button 5 to determine the result of one game, but in a game in which a pseudo game is executed as the second game, the reel 4 is first rotated by operating the start lever 3, and the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) by operating the stop button 5 to determine the result of the first game, and in that state (no bet number is set), the reel 4 is rotated again by operating the start lever 3 a second time, and the re-spinning reel 4 is stopped (actually stopped) by operating the stop button 5 a second time, making it possible to execute a game (so-called reel presentation).

Therefore, the period from the initial operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reel 4 is counted as one game, and by performing pseudo-stops of the reel 4 during that time, multiple game results are derived in one game (setting the number of bets for one game).
However, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination comes to a halt as a result of the simulated game (pseudo winning), no medals will be paid out as in a normal game.

In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a first game control means which can stop each of the reels 4 displaying a changing motion by operating each of the stop buttons 5 (plurality of stop operation means), and which can execute a normal game as a first game in which a predetermined game value (for example, the payout of a predetermined number of medals) can be awarded when a pattern combination formed by the stopping of each of the reels 4 becomes a predetermined pattern combination, based on the satisfaction of a game start condition (game start condition) such as the operation of the start lever 3.
The game system further includes a second game control means for stopping each reel 4 that is displaying a change by operating each stop button 5, and for executing a pseudo game as a second game in which a predetermined game value cannot be awarded even if a predetermined pattern combination is achieved, based on the establishment of a predetermined game start condition.

In the third embodiment, the period from the first operation of the start lever 3 to the pseudo stop of the reel 4 is called the pseudo game, and the period from the re-spinning of the reel 4 to the actual stop is called the actual game. In addition, the lottery result of the combination selected at the first operation of the start lever 3 is adopted at the actual stop.
When a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is simulated to stop in the simulated game, a lottery for a bonus, as described below, is conducted in the same manner as when a normal game (including the actual game) stops.
However, the lottery for the prize related to the pseudo game is not conducted at the time when each symbol stops in the pseudo game, but at the time when each symbol to stop in the pseudo game is determined in advance before the pseudo game is executed.
In addition, a lottery for a prize related to the pseudo game may be held at the time when each symbol comes to a pseudo stop.

In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus (such as a pseudo bonus state) when a symbol combination formed by the pseudo stopping of each reel 4 in the pseudo game as the second game becomes a specific symbol combination, such as a symbol combination corresponding to the winning of a rare role.

When reel 4 is pseudo-stopped, in order to differentiate it from a real stop, reel 4 may be moved up and down in small increments to indicate that a real stop has not yet occurred. Also, the number of pseudo plays executed during a normal game, i.e., pseudo stops of reel 4, may be three or more times, provided that they are performed multiple times.

In addition, the main control device 10 determines in advance the result of the pseudo game to be derived when the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped before the game in which the pseudo game is executed is executed, and executes the pseudo game based on the result of that determination.
In addition, the result of the pseudo game, which is derived when the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped, is determined based on the results of a plurality of normal games executed before the execution of the game that executes the pseudo game.

Specifically, when a common bell role is won as a predetermined role during execution of a normal game, the stopping result of one reel 4 (left reel 4a) in the pseudo game is determined, and when the common bell role is won next, the stopping result of another reel 4 (middle reel 4b) in the pseudo game is determined, and when the common bell role is won again, the stopping result of yet another reel 4 (right reel 4c) in the pseudo game is determined, so that the result of one pseudo game is determined by the winning of the common bell role a total of three times.
When the result of the pseudo game is determined, a prize lottery is held.

Therefore, the pseudo game is not executed until the common bell role is won three times, and the pseudo game is executed during the next game after the common bell role is won three times.
Then, when the simulated game ends, the result of the new simulated game for the execution of the next simulated game will be determined when the common bell role is subsequently won.
That is, the main control device 10 includes a stop symbol determining means capable of determining, for each reel 4, the symbol (symbol row) that will stop on each reel 4 in the pseudo game as the second game.
In addition, the main control device 10, which serves as a stopping pattern determination means, can determine the stopping pattern of one of the reels 4 in connection with the execution of one normal game (first game), and when all the stopping patterns on each reel 4 have been determined, it becomes possible to execute a pseudo game.

In addition, in the case where a symbol combination corresponding to a winning replay role is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game, the pseudo game is executed again, and the same process is repeated until a symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to a winning replay role is pseudo-stopped.

In addition, after a game capable of executing a pseudo game has been started, if no operation to pseudo-stop reel 4 is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), reel 4 may be automatically pseudo-stopped, or if no operation to spin reel 4 again is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after pseudo-stopping of reel 4, reel 4 may be automatically re-spinned.
In addition, in a game in which a pseudo game can be executed, the first pseudo game is executed and then the main game is executed, but it is also possible to execute the main game first and then execute the pseudo game.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, it is possible to execute a preview effect that notifies (predicts) the result of the above-mentioned predetermined pseudo game in advance, as shown in FIG. 24.

[Preview of pseudo game on main display in third embodiment]
FIG. 24 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when a notice effect is executed to notify (pre-announce) the result of a pseudo game in advance when a 3-bet game is executed.
The advance notice performance is performed using an advance notice reel image for notifying (advancing) the result of the simulated game in advance, and a result-deriving reel image for executing a pre-performance for determining the result of the simulated game.

The result-derived reel image corresponds to one of reels 4a to 4c, and is configured with all the symbols lined up vertically so that the symbol arrangement can be recognized, and when the common bell role is won, one of the symbol rows can be selected and announced.

The preview reel image is configured to display nine symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 6, corresponding to the reels 4a to 4c, and can notify in advance of the pattern sequence (prediction symbol) that is determined for each reel 4 through the advance performance of the result-derived reel image.

FIG. 24 shows a state in which the preview performance is being executed when the common bell role has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell role is to be won a second time.
First, as shown in FIG. 24(a), since the common bell role has already been won once, the symbol sequence (prediction symbol) determined at the time the common bell role was won is displayed in the left preview reel image 50a of the preview reel image 50 at the upper left of the screen.

That is, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is predetermined by the first common bell winning in the normal game after the previous pseudo game is executed, and the predetermined result is notified by the left preview reel image 50a. As shown in the figure, the currently predetermined symbol sequence is "Bell, BAR, Cherry" corresponding to the sequence numbers 11 to 13 of the left reel 4a, and is displayed as the left preview reel image 50a.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game has been determined in advance, and the results of the other reels 4 have not been determined in advance, so the areas of the center preview reel image 50b and the right preview reel image 50c are blank.

After the first common bell role is won, the player waits for the next common bell role to be won, and as shown in FIG. 24(a), a medium result derivation reel image 51a, which is used when the second common bell role is won, is displayed on the left side of the screen as a result derivation reel image.
The middle result derivation reel image 51a is composed of image patterns having the same pattern arrangement as the middle reel 4b, and notifies in advance that the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game will be determined by the winning of the next common bell role.

Then, when the second common bell combination is won, a frame image 51b is displayed on the middle result-deriving reel image 51a, as shown in FIG. 24(a).
This frame image 51b is configured to be capable of specifically displaying three pattern rows within the frame, and is configured to repeatedly scroll from top to bottom on the intermediate result derivation reel image 51a at a predetermined speed as shown, and then, when the scrolling stops, to derivatize and display the predetermined pattern rows within the frame, thereby enabling a pre-performance to be executed.

Next, Figure 24 (b) shows a case where, after two common bell roles have been won, in the pre-performance on the above-mentioned intermediate result derivation reel image 51a, sequence numbers 4 to 6 of the intermediate result derivation reel image 51a are derived and displayed when the frame image 51b stops.
In the pre-performance on the middle result derivation reel image 51a, when the frame image 51b stops, the sequence numbers 4 to 6 of the middle result derivation reel image 51a are derived and displayed, and as shown in Figure 24 (b), "Replay, Cherry, Watermelon" corresponding to the sequence numbers 4 to 6 of the middle reel 4b are pre-displayed as the middle preview reel image 50b as a result of the pre-performance.

In other words, the outcome of the middle reel 4b in the simulated game is predetermined by two common bell wins, and the predetermined outcome is announced by the middle preview reel image 50b consisting of "Replay, Cherry, and Watermelon."

After the second common bell role is won, the player waits for the next common bell role to be won, just like the first time, and as shown in Figure 24(b), a right result derivation reel image 52, which is used when the third common bell role is won, is displayed on the left side of the screen as a result derivation reel image.
Then, when the third common bell role is won, the result of the right reel 4c in the simulated game is determined in advance, as described above, and a pre-performance is executed on the right result derivation reel image 52, and the right preview reel image 50c is displayed as the result determined in advance.

If a symbol combination corresponding to a winning replay role is pseudo-stopped during a pseudo game, the pseudo game will be played again. In this case, the pseudo-stop symbol for the re-pseudo game will be re-drawn, but no preview performance will be given for the re-draw.

As described above, when the common bell role is won once, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game (pseudo stop result) is determined in advance, and this predetermined result is notified in advance by the left preview reel image 50a; similarly, when the common bell role is won twice, the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game is determined in advance, and this predetermined result is notified in advance by the middle preview reel image 50b; and further, when the common bell role is won three times, the result of the right reel 4c in the pseudo game is determined in advance, and this predetermined result is notified in advance by the right preview reel image 50c.

As a result, by winning the common bell role a total of three times, the pseudo stopping results of each of the reels 4a to 4c in the pseudo game are determined in advance, and all of the pseudo stopping results are notified in advance by the preview reel images 50a to 50c.
In other words, the sub-controller 20 is equipped with a notification means capable of notifying the player of the pseudo stopping pattern (row of patterns) of the reel 4 determined by the main controller 10 for a specified pseudo game before the specified pseudo game is executed.
Then, in the next game after the third common bell role is won, a pseudo game is executed in the first half of the game, and when the player operates the stop button 5, the pseudo stop results of each of the reels 4a to 4c that have been determined in advance are derived and displayed (pseudo stop).

In addition, when the main control device 10 derives and displays the pseudo stop result when the stop button 5 is operated during a pseudo game, the control is performed such that the pull-in range for the stop control of the above-mentioned symbols is not set, so that for all reels 4 during a pseudo game, regardless of when the player performs the stop operation, the predetermined symbols will be pulled in and pseudo-stopped.

In addition, the results of the pseudo game are judged in the same way as the results of the main game, and the lottery for awarding bonuses is also conducted in a manner similar to that of the main game, as will be described in detail later.
Therefore, for example, if the result of the pseudo game (pseudo stop result) is a symbol combination that is the same as the symbol combination that results in a winning cherry role in the main game, the pseudo game is also determined to be a winning cherry role, and a lottery for the corresponding bonus is held.

In other words, multiple pseudo games and main games are executed in one game, which can increase the player's expectations accordingly.
Furthermore, since the result of the simulated game is notified in advance, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for a long period of time even before the simulated game begins.

In addition, since the outcome of the simulated game is determined in advance by winning the common bell role in the regular game, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the outcome of the regular game as well, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
In addition, since the right to play one pseudo game is granted by winning the common bell role multiple times, in a state in which a pseudo game has not yet been played despite the common bell role being won a predetermined number of times, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play, and the operating rate of the gaming machine increases accordingly, which is also beneficial for the gaming facility.

Furthermore, the main control device 10 correlates normal games (including the main game) and pseudo games with each other and controls the awarding of benefits.
For example, when a high probability state occurs based on the result of the normal game, a lottery control for a special prize based on the high probability state is also performed in the pseudo game.
Therefore, if an intermediate result that may result in a rare winning combination is derived in the preview performance, it is possible to create a game progression in which the order is reversed from the conventional order, such that the player will hope for a high probability state in the actual game before the final pseudo-game is executed.

In other words, in the past, for example, after a game had transitioned to a high probability state, the game progressed in a way that expected a rare combination to be won. However, in the third embodiment, it is possible to determine in advance whether a rare combination will be won, and then to create a game progression in which the game progresses in a way that expects a transition to a high probability state, making it possible to realize a novel and highly entertaining game that has never been seen before.

The outcome of the simulated game may be determined in advance at the start of the game in which each common bell role is won, or at the end of that game.
In addition, the judgment of the result of the pseudo game is performed in advance before the start of the game in which the pseudo game is executed, as the result has already been determined before the execution of the game in which the pseudo game is executed, and the judgment result is stored and stored for use at a later time, but the judgment may also be made at the start of the game in which the pseudo game is actually executed or at the end of the pseudo game (when the pseudo game is stopped).
As described above, the preview performance of the pseudo game is executed on the main display device in the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used when executing a pseudo game with the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a control for determining in advance the result of a pseudo game by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
As mentioned above, the outcome of the pseudo game is predetermined based on the winning of the common bell role when the three-bet game is executed in the advantageous zone before the pseudo game is executed, but the control of this predetermined determination is not always executed in a fixed manner, but rather, by using multiple pseudo game tables, the predetermined content is controlled so that it changes for each pseudo game table.

Specifically, the main control device 10 predetermines the outcome of the pseudo game by using one of six pseudo game tables, namely, a weak table, a strong table, a solid table, a special 1 table, a special 2 table, and a special 3 table, as the pseudo game table.
In each pseudo game table, control is performed so that the pre-determined contents of the pseudo game related to the lottery for the special prize are changed.
For example, when the outcome of a simulated game is determined in advance using a strong table, control is performed so that the probability of an outcome corresponding to a rare role being derived is higher than when a weak table is used.

That is, the results of the pseudo game, which have different degrees of advantage for the player, are determined in advance for each pseudo game table.
The pseudo game table is determined by lottery in the main control device 10 each time a pseudo game is executed, and the result of the next pseudo game is determined in advance using the determined pseudo game table.

Furthermore, the main control device 10 is configured to set a plurality of pseudo game LVs (pseudo game levels), and when the pseudo game table is determined, the pseudo game LV at that time is referred to.
The pseudo game LV is a control state that is controlled by the main control device 10 and affects the outcome of the pseudo game, and can be changed to four stages from 1 to 4, with the probability of selecting a pseudo game table differing for each stage.

Basically, the higher the stage, the higher the probability that a pseudo-game table that is advantageous to the player will be selected. Therefore, when controlled at LV4 (second state) rather than LV1 (first state), the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to a specified rare role stopping in the pseudo-game is higher, and the pseudo-game result is more advantageous to the player.
In other words, the main control unit 10 controls the pseudo-game so that the probability of deriving a pattern combination corresponding to a rare role as the second specific pattern combination is higher in a state controlled by LV4 (second state) than in a state controlled by LV1 (first state).
Therefore, first the pseudo game level at that time is determined, then the current pseudo game table is determined based on the determined pseudo game level, and the result of the pseudo game is determined in advance using the determined pseudo game table.

In addition, the pseudo game level is set to an initial value of LV1 when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and thereafter, a lottery to promote the pseudo game level is held each time a bell role is won during the pseudo game, as described below, and if the promotion lottery is won, the player will be promoted from the pseudo game level at that time to the pseudo game level of the next level.
In addition, the pseudo game level will not be downgraded during the advantageous zone, and the pseudo game level at that time will be maintained unless promoted until the advantageous zone transitions to the normal zone due to the end of the AT state, etc., but it may also be downgraded during the advantageous zone when certain conditions are met.

Figure 25 shows a pseudo game table determination table used by the main control device 10 when determining the pseudo game table when the first common bell role is won after the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and when the first common bell role is won after the previous pseudo game ends.

The selection of the pseudo game table is performed by the main control device 10 by drawing random numbers for the pseudo game table selection. In FIG. 25, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers when each pseudo game table is determined is shown.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the pseudo game level is LV1, there is a 192/256 probability that the weak table is selected, a 32/256 probability that the strong table is selected, a 32/256 probability that the serious table is selected, a 0/256 probability that the special 1 table is selected, a 0/256 probability that the special 2 table is selected, and a 0/256 probability that the special 3 table is selected.

In addition, when the pseudo game level is LV2, there is a 136/256 probability that the weak table will be selected, a 64/256 probability that the strong table will be selected, a 32/256 probability that the serious table will be selected, an 8/256 probability that the special 1 table will be selected, an 8/256 probability that the special 2 table will be selected, and an 8/256 probability that the special 3 table will be selected.

In addition, when the pseudo game level is LV3, there is a 48/256 probability that the weak table will be selected, a 128/256 probability that the strong table will be selected, a 32/256 probability that the serious table will be selected, a 16/256 probability that the special 1 table will be selected, a 16/256 probability that the special 2 table will be selected, and a 16/256 probability that the special 3 table will be selected.

In addition, when the pseudo game level is LV4, there is a 0/256 probability that the weak table will be selected, a 0/256 probability that the strong table will be selected, a 32/256 probability that the serious table will be selected, a 74/256 probability that the special 1 table will be selected, a 75/256 probability that the special 2 table will be selected, and a 75/256 probability that the special 3 table will be selected.

Since the pseudo game table is determined as described above, the higher the pseudo game level, the higher the probability that the following table will be selected in the order of weak table → strong table → serious table → special 1 table → special 2 table → special 3 table.
Therefore, the pseudo game table changes depending on the pseudo game level, making it possible to derive highly interesting pseudo game results.
Furthermore, the higher the pseudo game level, the higher the probability that a pseudo game table advantageous to the player will be selected, which makes it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

As will be described in more detail later, the degree of advantage given to the player basically increases in the order of weak table → strong table → serious table → special 1 table → special 2 table → special 3 table, so the higher the pseudo-game level, the higher the probability that a pseudo-game table with a higher advantage will be selected.
In addition, although the initial value of the pseudo game level is LV1, it may be something else. For example, if the winning role at the time of transition to the advantageous zone is a rare role, a pseudo game level higher than LV1 may be set as the initial value.
As described above, the pseudo gaming table selection process in the third embodiment is executed.

[Lottery table used when upgrading pseudo game level in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a control when the pseudo game level is promoted by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, the pseudo game LV is referenced when determining the pseudo game table, and when a bell role is won during a pseudo game executed in a normal game state, that is, when a symbol combination corresponding to a bell role winning is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, a lottery is executed to raise the pseudo game LV to a higher level.
For example, the pseudo game level is set to LV1 as the initial state upon transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but if a pseudo game is played in this state and a bell role is won (pseudo win), a lottery is held to promote the pseudo game level, and if the promotion lottery is won and promotion to the next level is determined, the pseudo game level is promoted to LV2, and from then on, a pseudo game table that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to be determined.

Figure 26 shows a pseudo game level lottery table used by the main control device 10 to advance the pseudo game level when a bell role is won during a pseudo game executed in the normal game mode.

The pseudo game level promotion lottery is performed by the main control device 10 by drawing random numbers for the pseudo game level lottery, and in Figure 26, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is 256, and the number of random numbers when promotion and maintenance of each pseudo game level is determined is shown.

First, Figure 26 (a) shows a case where the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is one of settings 1 to 3.
As shown in FIG. 26(a), if the pseudo-game level at that time (present) is LV1, when a bell role is won during the pseudo-game, a promotion lottery is held such that there is a 222/256 probability of maintaining the level at LV1, a 32/256 probability of being promoted to LV2, a 1/256 probability of being promoted to LV3, and a 1/256 probability of being promoted to LV4.

In addition, if the pseudo game level at that time (currently) is LV2, when a bell role is won during the pseudo game, a promotion lottery will be held with a probability of 0/256, i.e., no demotion to LV1, a probability of 223/256 to remain at LV2, a probability of 32/256 to be promoted to LV3, and a probability of 1/256 to be promoted to LV4.

In addition, if the pseudo game level at that time (currently) is LV3, when a bell role is won during the pseudo game, a promotion lottery will be held with a probability of 0/256, i.e., no demotion to LV1 or LV2, but with a probability of 224/256 to remain at LV3 and with a probability of 32/256 to be promoted to LV4.

Next, Figure 26 (b) shows a case where the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is one of settings 4 to 6.
As shown in FIG. 26(b), if the pseudo-game level at that time (currently) is LV1, when a bell role is won during the pseudo-game, a promotion lottery is held such that there is a 204/256 probability of maintaining the level at LV1, a 48/256 probability of being promoted to LV2, a 2/256 probability of being promoted to LV3, and a 2/256 probability of being promoted to LV4.

In addition, if the pseudo game level at that time (currently) is LV2, when a bell role is won during the pseudo game, a promotion lottery will be held with a probability of 0/256, i.e., no demotion to LV1, a probability of 206/256 to remain at LV2, a probability of 48/256 to be promoted to LV3, and a probability of 2/256 to be promoted to LV4.

In addition, if the pseudo game level at that time (currently) is LV3, when a bell role is won during the pseudo game, a promotion lottery will be held with a probability of 0/256, i.e., no demotion to LV1 or LV2, a probability of 208/256 to remain at LV3, and a probability of 48/256 to be promoted to LV4.

Since the pseudo gaming level promotion lottery is conducted as described above, the higher the setting value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that the pseudo gaming level will be promoted, and further, the probability of being promoted to a higher level (for example, two levels higher) tends to be higher.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation by increasing the pseudo game level.
Furthermore, if the set value in the probability setting device 14 is relatively high, it is possible to increase the player's expectations, and by changing the set value in the probability setting device 14, it is possible to adjust the promotion rate of the pseudo game level, thereby enabling game establishments to operate more efficiently.

In addition, the pseudo game level promotion lottery is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning bell role during the pseudo game is determined, so when the pseudo game is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the promotion of the pseudo game level.

In addition, when the pseudo game level is LV4, a promotion lottery is not held. However, even when the level is LV4, a lottery corresponding to the promotion lottery may be held, and if the lottery is won, a specified benefit (e.g., pseudo bonus state or AT state) may be awarded, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction when the common bell role is won when the pseudo game level is LV4.
As described above, the pseudo game level promotion lottery in the third embodiment is executed.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using a weak table in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, the determination control of the result of the pseudo game, that is, the symbol combination derived when the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped during the game, when each pseudo game table is used will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, FIG. 27 shows the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game and the selection probability of each symbol sequence, which are determined in advance when a common bell role is won, when a weak table is selected as the pseudo game table.

Figure 27(a) shows the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during pseudo play when using a weak table, with boxes 1 to 4 shown on each reel 4 being the symbol sequence options at the time of pseudo stop, and each symbol within the box will be the symbol sequence displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in pseudo play. Also, Figure 27(b) shows the selection probability values for the weak table when selecting a symbol sequence (boxes 1 to 4) on each reel 4 when the common bell role is won.

As a result of the pseudo game, the options that can be selected are only four types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown in the figure, and other symbol rows cannot be selected.
Therefore, the result of the pseudo game is derived from the combination of the above-mentioned four types of predetermined pattern strings, and these options are set to have characteristics for each pseudo game table. When a weak table is selected, other than a miss, only the replay and bell roles corresponding to the first specific pattern combination are capable of winning (pseudo winning), and other roles are not viable options.

The selection of the symbol row on each reel 4 is performed by the main control device 10 by drawing random numbers for the symbol row selection. In Figures 27 to 32, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers when each symbol row is selected is shown.

As shown in Figures 27(a) and (b), when a weak table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the first common bell role is won, the left 1 slot ("Replay Bell Blue 7") is selected with a probability of 64/256, the left 2 slot ("Replay Bell White 7") is selected with a probability of 64/256, the left 3 slot ("Replay Bell BAR") is selected with a probability of 64/256, and the left 4 slot ("Replay Bell Blank") is selected with a probability of 64/256 as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a is pseudo stopped in the pseudo game.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the second time, the symbol sequence when center reel 4b is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game will be selected in middle slot 1 ("Bell Replay Cherry") with a probability of 64/256, middle slot 2 ("Red 7 Bell Replay") with a probability of 64/256, middle slot 3 ("Bell Replay Cherry") with a probability of 64/256, and middle slot 4 ("BAR Bell Replay") with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the third time, the symbol sequence when right reel 4c stops in the simulated game will be selected in right 1 slot ("Blue 7, Bell, Replay") with a probability of 64/256, right 2 slot ("Bell, Replay, Watermelon") with a probability of 64/256, right 3 slot ("White 7, Bell, Replay") with a probability of 64/256, and right 4 slot ("Replay, Blank, Bell") with a probability of 64/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
For example, if the left 1 slot is selected on the left reel 4a, the middle 2 slot is selected on the middle reel 4b, and the right 3 slot is selected on the right reel 4c, then as a result of the simulated game, "Bell Bell Bell" will stop on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning bell role will be determined in advance.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

In addition, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay winning combination is pseudo-stopped (pseudo-winning) during a pseudo game using each pseudo game table, a re-pseudo game will be executed. In this case, when a re-pseudo game is decided, the pseudo game table selection process is executed again, and the symbol sequence that will pseudo-stop on each reel 4 will be re-determined using the re-selected pseudo game table.

In this case, when the pseudo game replay is determined, the symbol sequence to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 is simultaneously determined again.
In addition, in order to prevent the replay of a pseudo game from being performed multiple times, when the replay of a pseudo game reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times), a pseudo game table on which a replay role cannot be won may be forcibly selected, or a predetermined bonus (e.g., CZ state) may be granted at that point.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when a weak table is selected, so that when a weak table is selected, the result of the pseudo game is determined so that only either the bell role or the replay role can win (pseudo win).
Therefore, when a weak table is selected, the probability that a pseudo game result that is relatively disadvantageous to the player will be derived increases.

Furthermore, even when a weak table is selected, if a replay role is won (pseudo win) in a pseudo game, the pseudo game table is re-drawn and a re-pseudo game is played. This creates the possibility that a re-pseudo game will be played using a pseudo game table that is more advantageous than the weak table, so it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing even when a weak table is selected.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the weak table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the strong table in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, Figure 28 shows the symbol sequences that are to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game and the selection probability of each symbol sequence, which are determined in advance when a common bell role is won, when a strong table is selected as the pseudo game table.

Figure 28(a) shows the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during pseudo play when a strong table is used, and just as when a weak table is used, the boxes 1 to 3 shown on each reel 4 are options for the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped.
Furthermore, when the strong table is used, unlike when the weak table is used, a left strong table for the left reel 4a as shown in Figure 28(b) and a middle/right strong table for the middle reel 4b and right reel 4c as shown in Figure 28(c) are provided, and when the first common bell role is won, a lottery is held using the left strong table, and when the second and third common bell roles are won, a lottery is held using the middle/right strong table.

When the strong table is used, the options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo game are only three types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. 28(a), and any other symbol rows cannot be selected.
Therefore, when the strong table is selected, all roles (including misses) except for the bonus role are options that can result in a winning (pseudo winning), and the pattern combinations that correspond to the winning of the rare role as the second specific pattern combination can also be pseudo-stopped.

As shown in Figures 28(a) and (b), if the strong table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the first common bell role is won, a lottery is held using the left strong table, and as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a is pseudo stopped in the pseudo game, the left 1st slot ("watermelon, replay, bell") is selected with a probability of 96/256, the left 2nd slot ("bell, BAR, cherry") is selected with a probability of 64/256, and the left 3rd slot ("blank bell, watermelon") is selected with a probability of 96/256.

As shown in Figures 28(a) and (c), when the common bell role is won for the second time, a lottery is held using the center-right strong table, and as the symbol sequence when center reel 4b is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, the center 1 slot ("watermelon, red 7, bell") is selected with a probability of 86/256, the center 2 slot ("white 7, watermelon, white 7") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the center 3 slot ("replay, cherry, watermelon") is selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the third time, a lottery is held using the middle-right strong table, and as the symbol sequence when right reel 4c is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, right 1 slot ("watermelon, red 7, blue 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256, right 2 slot ("replay, watermelon, cherry") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and right 3 slot ("bell, replay, watermelon") is selected with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
For example, if the left slot is selected for the left reel 4a, the middle slot is selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right slot is selected for the right reel 4c, then as a result of the simulated game, "watermelon watermelon watermelon" will stop on the top line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning watermelon role will be determined in advance.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when the strong table is selected. Therefore, when the strong table is selected, the result of the pseudo game is determined so that all roles except for the bonus role can be pseudo-winning.
Therefore, when a strong table is selected, there is a possibility that the simulated game result will be a cherry winning combination or a watermelon winning combination, etc., so the probability of a simulated game result that is favorable to the player is higher than when a weak table is selected, making it possible to heighten the player's expectations.

In addition, if a cherry or watermelon symbol is pseudo-winning as a result of the pseudo game, a lottery for upgrading the pseudo game level may be held.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the strong table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using Gachi table in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, Figure 29 shows, when a real table is selected as the pseudo game table, the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo game and the selection probability of each symbol sequence, which are determined in advance when the common bell role is won.

FIG. 29(a) shows the symbol rows that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game when a real table is used. Unlike when a weak table and a strong table are used, not only specific symbol rows are set as options, but symbol rows formed by all the symbols on each reel 4 are options.
Therefore, when drawing a pattern row, a drawing is performed for each pattern, not for each frame, and the pattern row with the winning pattern located in the upper row in the display window 6 is selected as the result of the pseudo game.

In addition, when the Gachi table is used, a common Gachi table is used for each reel 4 as shown in Figure 29 (b), and when the common bell role is won for the first to third times, a lottery is held using the common Gachi table.
In addition, the options that can be selected as a result of simulated play when using the Gachi table are set to all of the symbol rows displayed on each reel 4 as shown in Figure 29 (a), so when the Gachi table is selected, all roles (including misses) can result in simulated winning.

As shown in Figures 29(a) and (b), when the Gachi table is selected as the pseudo gaming table, a lottery is held using the Gachi table when the common bell role is won for the first, second, and third times, the symbols that will stop pseudo-on the top row of each reel 4 will be selected as 1 to 16 with a probability of 13/256, and 17 to 20 with a probability of 12/256.

Therefore, for example, when a symbol is selected for the left reel 4a, a "replay, bell, blue 7" will stop as the symbol row on the left reel 4a, when a symbol is selected for the center reel 4b, a "blank, watermelon, blue 7" will stop as the symbol row on the center reel 4b, and when a symbol is selected for the right reel 4c, a "watermelon, red 7, blue 7" will stop as the symbol row on the right reel 4c. The results of the simulated game are determined in advance.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
Therefore, when using the Gachi table, it is also possible to pseudo-stop combinations of symbols that directly confer special benefits (CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state, etc.).

For example, if two symbols (a row of "bell, blue 7, red 7") are selected for the left reel 4a, two symbols (a row of "watermelon, blue 7, bell") are selected for the middle reel 4b, and two symbols (a row of "red 7, blue 7, bell") are selected for the right reel 4c, the symbol combination of "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" will stop pseudo on the middle line, and a win in the blue 7 pseudo bonus state (pseudo win) will be achieved.

Similarly, when the symbol combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" pseudo-stops, a winning entry in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state (pseudo winning entry) is achieved, when the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" pseudo-stops, a winning entry in the AT state (pseudo winning entry) is achieved, and when the symbol combination of "BAR, BAR, BAR" pseudo-stops, a winning entry in the CZ state (pseudo winning entry) is achieved.
In other words, in a normal game, even if one does not win the lottery for the award of a special benefit (CZ state, pseudo bonus state, AT state, etc.), there is an opportunity to be awarded a special benefit such as transitioning to a pseudo bonus state based on the results of the pseudo game.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, when a 7 symbol (the symbol row of "bell, white 7, bell") is selected for the left reel 4a, an 11 symbol (the symbol row of "white 7, watermelon, white 7") is selected for the middle reel 4b, and a 12 symbol (the symbol row of "cherry, white 7, bell") is selected for the right reel 4c, a special judgment different from the winning of a normal role is made as a pseudo-stop of a special symbol combination.
Similarly, if a 17 symbol (the symbol sequence of "Bell, Blank, Bell") is selected for the left reel 4a, and a symbol sequence that cannot result in a bell combination is selected for the other reels 4, this is also determined to be a special symbol combination.
Similarly, if a 5 symbol (the symbol sequence of "REPLAY-BAR-REPLAY") is selected for the right reel 4c, and a symbol sequence that cannot result in a replay is selected for the other reels 4, this is also determined to be a special symbol combination.

Furthermore, when the 13 symbol (the symbol sequence of "BAR, cherry, and watermelon") is selected for the left reel 4a, a special judgment different from the winning combination of a normal combination is made, with the so-called middle cherry stopping, regardless of the symbol sequence of the other reels 4.
In addition, since the special symbol combination and the symbol combination of the middle cherry can be simulated to stop simultaneously during one simulated game, in such a case, a priority may be assigned according to the size of the benefit (degree of advantage) to be obtained, and a lottery may be held for one of the symbol combinations, or a lottery may be held for both.

Similarly, when a special symbol combination or a pseudo-stop of a symbol combination of cherries in the middle row occurs, a symbol combination that confirms the award of a special bonus (such as "white 7, white 7, white 7") may be formed. In such cases, it is preferable to give priority to the symbol combination that confirms the award of a special bonus. However, for example, if the symbol combination of cherries in the middle row and the symbol combination of "BAR, BAR, BAR" occur simultaneously, a lottery may be run for both.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when the Gachi table is selected, and therefore, when the Gachi table is selected, the result of the pseudo game is determined so that all of the set roles can result in a pseudo win.
Therefore, when the Gachi table is selected, there is a possibility of a pseudo-winning rare role, such as a pseudo-winning cherry role or a pseudo-winning watermelon role, as a result of the pseudo play, which can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the Gachi table is selected, all the symbols (symbol rows) on each reel 4 can be stopped in the simulated game, making it possible to make the results of the simulated game more diverse and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when the Gachi table is selected, there is a possibility that the pseudo play will result in the award of benefits other than small prizes, such as a transition to a pseudo bonus state. For example, even if the player does not win the lottery for the pseudo bonus state in the normal game, it is possible to transition to the pseudo bonus state through pseudo play, which can greatly heighten the player's expectations.

Furthermore, when the Gachi table is selected, a symbol sequence capable of forming a special symbol combination is also selected, which can further increase the player's sense of expectation.
Furthermore, when the Gachi table is selected, it is possible to stop the so-called middle cherry symbol row, which is a symbol combination that includes the symbol row of "BAR, cherry, and watermelon" in the display window 6 of the left reel 4a, which cannot be stopped in a normal game. This makes it possible to play an innovative game that cannot be realized in a normal game, and to play an extremely entertaining game.

When the Gachi table is selected, the lottery is performed so that all symbol rows have an almost equal chance of pseudo-stopping, but the lottery does not have to be performed evenly. For example, the selection rate for symbol rows that are more likely to award a special bonus may be lower or higher than that for other symbol rows.
In addition, when a real table is selected and a replay role is pseudo-winning in a pseudo game, it is preferable to reselect a pseudo game table with an advantage set to be equal to or higher than that of the real table in the re-pseudo game.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the Gachi table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using special 1 table in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, Figure 30 shows, when the Special 1 table is selected as the pseudo game table, the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo game, which is determined in advance when the common bell role is won, and the selection probability of each symbol sequence.

Figure 30(a) shows the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game when using the Special 1 table, and the boxes 1 to 3 shown on each reel 4 are the symbol sequence options at the time of the pseudo stop, and each symbol within the box becomes the symbol sequence that is displayed in the display window 6 at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game. Also, Figure 30(b) shows the selection probability values of the Special 1 table when selecting the symbol sequence (boxes 1 to 3) on each reel 4 when the common bell role is won.

When the Special 1 table is used, a common Special 1 table is used for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. 30(b), and when the common bell role is won for the first to third times, a lottery is held using the common Special 1 table.

In addition, when using the Special 1 table, the options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo-game are only three types of symbol rows for each reel 4, as shown in Figure 30 (a), and some of the symbols are set to overlap within the range of two symbols above and below the "red 7".
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, on the left reel 4a, the first left frame has the symbol rows set as "bell, blue 7, red 7," the second left frame has "blue 7, red 7, watermelon," and the third left frame has "red 7, watermelon, replay," and the symbol rows containing the "red 7" are always available as options, and for the center reel 4b and right reel 4c, as with the left reel 4a, the symbol rows containing the "red 7" are always available as options.
In other words, when the Special 1 table is selected, the probability of the symbol combination of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7", which can generate the Red 7 pseudo bonus state, stopping pseudo increases.
In addition, when the special 1 table is selected, a miss and a pseudo win of the watermelon role are also possible.

As shown in Figures 30(a) and (b), when the Special 1 table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the first common bell role is won, the left 1 slot ("bell, blue 7, red 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256 as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a pseudo stops in the pseudo game, the left 2 slot ("blue 7, red 7, watermelon") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the left 3 slot ("red 7, watermelon, replay") is selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the second time, the symbol sequence when center reel 4b is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game will be selected in middle slot 1 ("cherry, watermelon, red 7") with a probability of 86/256, middle slot 2 ("watermelon, red 7, bell") with a probability of 85/256, and middle slot 3 ("red 7, bell, replay") with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the third time, the symbol sequence when right reel 4c stops in the simulated game will be selected in right 1 slot ("replay, watermelon, red 7") with a probability of 86/256, right 2 slot ("watermelon, red 7, blue 7") with a probability of 85/256, and right 3 slot ("red 7, blue 7, bell") with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
For example, if the left two slots are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle two slots are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right two slots are selected for the right reel 4c, then as a result of the pseudo game, "red 7, red 7, red 7" will stop on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the red 7 pseudo bonus state will be determined in advance.

Therefore, when using the Special 1 table, just like when using the Gachi table, even if you do not win the lottery for the pseudo bonus state in the normal game, you will have the opportunity to move directly to the Red 7 pseudo bonus state based on the results of the pseudo play.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when the Special 1 table is selected. Therefore, when the Special 1 table is selected, the symbol row selected will always include the symbol "Red 7", increasing the probability of the symbol combination "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" which can generate the Red 7 pseudo bonus state stopping.
Therefore, when the Special 1 table is selected, the possibility of the Red 7 pseudo bonus state occurring becomes extremely high, which can further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when the Special 1 table is selected, a pseudo-winning watermelon role is also possible, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectations even if the Red 7 pseudo-bonus state does not occur.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the special 1 table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using special 2 table in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, Figure 31 shows, when the Special 2 table is selected as the pseudo game table, the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo game, which is determined in advance when the common bell role is won, and the selection probability of each symbol sequence.

Figure 31(a) shows the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game when using the Special 2 table, and the boxes 1 to 3 shown on each reel 4 are the symbol sequence options at the time of the pseudo stop, and each symbol within the box becomes the symbol sequence that is displayed in the display window 6 at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game. Also, Figure 31(b) shows the selection probability values of the Special 2 table when selecting the symbol sequence (boxes 1 to 3) on each reel 4 when the common bell role is won.

When the Special 2 table is used, a common Special 2 table is used for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. 31(b), and when the common bell role is won for the first to third times, a lottery is held using the common Special 2 table.

In addition, when the Special 2 table is used, the options that can be selected as a result of the simulated play are limited to three types of symbol rows for each reel 4, as shown in Figure 31 (a), and some of the symbols are set to overlap within the range of two symbols above and below the "Blue 7".
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, on the left reel 4a, the first left frame has the symbol row set as "Replay, Bell, Blue 7," the second left frame has "Bell, Blue 7, Red 7," and the third left frame has "Blue 7, Red 7, Watermelon," and the symbol row containing the "Blue 7" is always an option, and for the center reel 4b and right reel 4c, as with the left reel 4a, the symbol row containing the "Blue 7" is always an option.
In other words, when the Special 2 table is selected, the probability of the symbol combination of "Blue 7, Blue 7, Blue 7", which can generate a Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, stopping pseudo increases.
In addition, when the special 2 table is selected, in addition to a miss, pseudo wins of the bell role and the watermelon role are also possible.

As shown in Figures 31(a) and (b), when the Special 2 table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the first common bell role is won, the left 1 slot ("Replay, Bell, Blue 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256, the left 2 slot ("Bell, Blue 7, Red 7") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the left 3 slot ("Blue 7, Red 7, Watermelon") is selected with a probability of 85/256 as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a pseudo stops in the pseudo game.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the second time, the symbol sequence when center reel 4b is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game will be selected in middle slot 1 ("blank, watermelon, blue 7") with a probability of 86/256, middle slot 2 ("watermelon, blue 7, bell") with a probability of 85/256, and middle slot 3 ("blue 7, bell, replay") with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the common bell role is won for the third time, the symbol sequence when right reel 4c stops in the simulated game will be selected in right 1 slot ("watermelon, red 7, blue 7") with a probability of 86/256, right 2 slot ("red 7, blue 7, bell") with a probability of 85/256, and right 3 slot ("blue 7, bell, replay") with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
For example, if the left two slots are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle two slots are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right two slots are selected for the right reel 4c, then as a result of the pseudo game, "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" will stop on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be determined in advance.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when the Special 2 table is selected. Therefore, when the Special 2 table is selected, the symbol string that is selected will always include the symbol "Blue 7", increasing the probability of the symbol combination "Blue 7, Blue 7, Blue 7" that can generate the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state stopping.
Therefore, when the Special 2 table is selected, the possibility of the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state occurring becomes extremely high, which can further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

As will be explained in more detail later, the advantage to the player is set higher in the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state than in the Red 7 pseudo bonus state, so when the Special 2 table is selected, it is possible to increase the player's expectations more than when the Special 1 table is selected.

Furthermore, when the Special 2 table is selected, a pseudo-winning watermelon symbol is also possible, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations even if the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state does not occur. Furthermore, a winning bell symbol is also possible, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations more than when the Special 1 table is selected.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the special 2 table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using special 3 table in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, Figure 32 shows, when the Special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo game, which is determined in advance when the common bell role is won, and the selection probability of each symbol sequence.

Figure 32 (a) shows the symbol sequences that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during pseudo play when using the Special 3 table. The boxes 1 to 3 shown on each reel 4 are options for the symbol sequences when pseudo-stopped, and each symbol within the box becomes the symbol sequence that is displayed in the display window 6 when pseudo-stopped in pseudo play.

In addition, Figure 32(b) shows the left and right special 3 table used to select the pattern row (boxes 1 to 3) on the left reel 4a and right reel 4c when the first and third common bell roles are won, and Figure 32(c) shows the middle special 3 table used to select the pattern row (boxes 1 to 2) on the middle reel 4b when the second common bell role is won.
Therefore, when the special 3 table is used, there are only two options for the symbol row corresponding to the center reel 4b (two frames).

In addition, when the Special 3 table is used, the options that can be selected as a result of the simulated play are limited to two or three types of symbol rows for each reel 4, as shown in FIG. 32(a), and some of the symbols are set to overlap within a range of a predetermined number of symbols above and below the "white 7."
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, on the left reel 4a, the two left frames have the symbol rows set as "Replay, Bell, White 7," the two left frames have "Bell, White 7, Bell," and the three left frames have "White 7, Bell, Watermelon," and symbol rows containing the "White 7" symbol are always available as options, and for the center reel 4b and right reel 4c, as with the left reel 4a, symbol rows containing the "White 7" symbol are also available as options.

In other words, when the Special 3 table is selected, the probability of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" corresponding to the occurrence of the AT state being pseudo-stopped increases.
In addition, when the special 3 table is selected, in addition to a miss, a pseudo win of the watermelon role is also possible.

As shown in Figures 32(a) and (b), when the Special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the first common bell role is won, a lottery is held using the left and right Special 3 tables, and as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a pseudo stops in the pseudo game, the left 1st slot ("Replay, Bell, White 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256, the left 2nd slot ("Bell, White 7, Bell") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the left 3rd slot ("White 7, Bell, Watermelon") is selected with a probability of 85/256.

Also, as shown in Figures 32(a) and (c), if the Special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the second common bell role is won, a lottery is held using the middle Special 3 table, and as the pattern sequence when the center reel 4b is pseudo stopped in the pseudo game, the middle 1 slot ("replay, white 7, watermelon") is selected with a probability of 128/256, and the middle 2 slot ("white, watermelon, white 7") is selected with a probability of 128/256.

Also, as shown in Figures 32(a) and (b), if the Special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, when the third common bell role is won, a lottery is held using the left and right Special 3 tables, and as the symbol sequence when the right reel 4c is pseudo stopped in the pseudo game, the right 1st slot ("watermelon, cherry, white 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256, the right 2nd slot ("cherry, white 7, bell") is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the right 3rd slot ("white 7, bell, replay") is selected with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game.
For example, if the left two slots are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle slot is selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right two slots are selected for the right reel 4c, then as a result of the pseudo game, "white 7, white 7, white 7" will stop on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the AT state will be determined in advance.

In addition, if the two leftmost slots (the row of symbols "Bell, White 7, Bell") are selected for the left reel 4a, the two middle slots (the row of symbols "White 7, Watermelon, White 7") are selected for the center reel 4b, and the two rightmost slots (the row of symbols "Cherry, White 7, Bell") are selected for the right reel 4c, a special symbol combination will stop and a special judgment different from the winning combination for normal roles will be made.

In addition, the determined symbol combination for the pseudo game is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 as a preview reel image during the preview performance described above.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination for the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the simulated game is determined when the Special 3 table is selected. Therefore, when the Special 3 table is selected, the symbol row that is selected will always include the symbol "White 7", increasing the probability of the symbol combination of "White 7, White 7, White 7", which can generate an AT state, stopping in a simulated manner.
Therefore, when the Special 3 table is selected, the possibility of the AT state occurring becomes extremely high, making it possible to greatly heighten the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, since the degree of advantage to the player is set higher overall in the AT state than in the pseudo bonus state, when the Special 3 table is selected, it is possible to increase the player's expectations more than when the Special 1 table or the Special 2 table is selected.

Furthermore, when the Gachi table is selected, a symbol sequence capable of forming a special symbol combination is also selected, which can further increase the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, when the special 3 table is selected, a simulated win of the watermelon role is also possible, so that even if the AT state does not occur, it is possible to increase the player's expectations, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the special 3 table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Lottery table used when determining a high probability state in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, a high probability state in which the bonus lottery is executed with a high probability will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 33 shows a high probability lottery table used by the main control unit 10 when transitioning to a high probability state in the event of winning a specified rare role (cherry role, watermelon role) in the normal probability state, and when determining the number of games to continue in the high probability state.

In the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, under the control of the main control unit 10, a transition lottery to a high probability state is executed in response to the winning of a cherry or watermelon role in the normal game state, and if the transition lottery is won, the high probability state can be generated.
In the normal game during the high probability state, the selection of special prizes such as the CZ state, pseudo bonus state, and AT state is carried out with a higher probability than in the normal probability state.
Furthermore, the high probability state is also reflected in the pseudo game, and the lottery for the special prize is executed with a high probability in the pseudo game as well.
The transition to the high probability state will take place from the start of the game following the game in which the rare combination was won. Therefore, once the prize for the rare combination is selected in the normal probability state, the transition to the high probability state will take place from the start of the next game.

The lottery for transition to the high probability state is performed by the main control device 10 by drawing random numbers for the high probability transition lottery, and in Figure 33, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers when each lottery result is determined is shown.

First, FIG. 33(a) shows a high probability lottery table used when the cherry role is won in a normal game during the normal probability state.
As shown in Figure 33 (a), if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when the cherry role is won, a lottery is held such that there is a 232/256 probability of a miss, i.e., the normal probability state is maintained, there is an 18/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 10 games, there is a 4/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 20 games, and there is a 2/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 220/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 24/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 10/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 2/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 232/256 of missing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 16/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 6/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 2/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 220/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 22/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 10/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 4/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to setting 5, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 232/256 of missing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 14/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 8/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 2/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 6, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 220/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 20/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 10/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 6/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Next, FIG. 33(b) shows a high probability lottery table used when the watermelon role is won in a normal game during the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 33(b), if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with the following probability: a 192/256 probability of a miss, i.e., the normal probability state will be maintained, a 52/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 10 games, a 10/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 20 games, and a 2/256 probability of a high probability state lasting for 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 114/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 10/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 4/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 192/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 50/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 12/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 2/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 110/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 12/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 6/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 192/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 46/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 16/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 2/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 6, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 of losing, i.e., remaining in the normal probability state, a probability of 104/256 of a high probability state lasting 10 games, a probability of 16/256 of a high probability state lasting 20 games, and a probability of 8/256 of a high probability state lasting 30 games.

Since the lottery for transition to the high probability state is conducted as described above, if a cherry or watermelon role is won as a specified rare role, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of transitioning to the high probability state.
Furthermore, even if a rare role is won, the watermelon role is set to be more advantageous to the player than the cherry role in terms of the overall probability of transitioning to a high probability state and the number of games that can be continued if a transition to the high probability state is made, so that if the player wins the watermelon role, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, when the setting values are overall even numbers, the probability of transitioning to the high probability state is higher than when the setting values are odd numbers, and on the other hand, when the setting values are odd numbers, the probability of transitioning to the high probability state is lower than when the setting values are even numbers.However, when a transition to the high probability state is decided, the number of games to be continued is determined to be greater than when the setting values are even numbers, so that a variety of transition and continuation patterns to the high probability state can be realized, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.
Furthermore, by controlling the transition and continuation of the high probability state, it is possible to allow the player to guess the setting values to a certain extent, which can further increase the entertainment value of the game.
In addition, in the pseudo game, when a rare combination is won, a lottery for transition to a high probability state is not conducted, but it may be conducted in the same manner as described above.
As described above, the lottery for transition to the high probability state in the third embodiment is carried out.

[Lottery table used to determine a benefit when a winning combination is obtained by the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of a bonus lottery executed under the control of the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a rare role is won in either a normal game or a simulated game, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to determine whether or not to award a bonus (a bonus lottery).
The lottery for this special privilege is set so that the probability of winning differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state, and further, the probability of winning is set so as to differ for each set value in the probability setting device 14.

In pseudo games, unlike regular games, the lottery for winning combinations (so-called one-shot lottery) is not conducted, but the lottery for winning combinations is conducted when the symbols that will stop pseudo on each reel 4 are determined, and if a symbol combination that corresponds to a rare combination is determined at this time, the rare combination is won.

In addition to winning the rare symbol, the lottery for the bonus is also held when the special symbol combination mentioned above is determined or when the symbol combination of the middle cherry is determined, and a special lottery different from the one held when a rare symbol is won is held.
The prize draw is conducted by the main control unit 10 by drawing random numbers for the prize draw. In Figure 34, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is 256, and the number of random numbers for each draw result is shown.
Also, FIGS. 34(a) to (d) show lottery tables that are used in common in normal games and pseudo games, and FIGS. 34(e) and (f) show lottery tables that are used only in pseudo games.

First, FIG. 34(a) shows a lottery table used when the cherry role is won in a normal game and pseudo game during the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 222/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 16/256 for winning the CZ state, a probability of 4/256 for winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 12/256 for winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 2/256 for winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 208/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 20/256 for a CZ state, a probability of 16/256 for a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 8/256 for a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 4/256 for an AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 218/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 16/256 for a CZ state, a probability of 6/256 for a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 14/256 for a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 2/256 for an AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 204/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 24/256 for a CZ state, a probability of 16/256 for a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 8/256 for a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 4/256 for an AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to setting 5, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 202/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 16/256 for a CZ state, a probability of 12/256 for a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 20/256 for a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 6/256 for an AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to setting 6, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a probability of 184/256 for a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a probability of 32/256 for a CZ state, a probability of 16/256 for a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 8/256 for a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 16/256 for an AT state.

Next, FIG. 34(b) shows a lottery table used when the cherry role is won in a normal game and a pseudo game during a high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(b), if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when the cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 128/256 probability of missing, i.e., no bonus, a 64/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 16/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 32/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 16/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 74/256 probability of losing, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a 128/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 32/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 10/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 12/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 96/256 probability of losing, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a 64/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 16/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 48/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 32/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 64/256 probability of losing, i.e., no bonus being awarded, a 128/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 32/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 16/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 16/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 64/256 probability of losing, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a 48/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 32/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 64/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 48/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to setting 6, when a cherry role is won, a lottery is held with a 64/256 probability of losing, i.e. no bonus being awarded, a 64/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 64/256 probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 32/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 32/256 probability of winning the AT state.

Next, FIG. 34(c) shows a lottery table used when the watermelon role is won in the normal game and pseudo game during the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(c), if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held so that there is a 240/256 probability of a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, an 8/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, an 8/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 236/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 10/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 10/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 232/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 12/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 12/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 228/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 14/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 14/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 224/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 16/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 16/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 6, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 220/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, an 18/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, an 18/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Next, FIG. 34(d) shows a lottery table used when the watermelon role is won in a normal game and a pseudo game during a high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(d), if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held so that there is a 232/256 probability of a miss, i.e., no bonus is awarded, a 16/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, an 8/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 226/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 20/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 10/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 220/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 24/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 12/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 214/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 28/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 14/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 5, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 208/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 32/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a 16/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to setting 6, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is drawn so that there is a 202/256 probability of a miss, i.e. no bonus is awarded, a 36/256 probability of winning the CZ state, a 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state, an 18/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a 0/256 probability of not winning the AT state.

Next, FIG. 34(e) shows a lottery table used when a symbol combination capable of awarding a privilege other than the rare symbols described above is formed in a pseudo game during the normal probability state.
In addition, when a symbol combination capable of awarding a special privilege other than a rare symbol is formed in the pseudo game, a lottery is held regardless of the setting value in the probability setting device 14 for both the normal probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 34(e), when the symbol combination of cherries in the middle row is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, a lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 resulting in a miss, i.e. no bonus being awarded, a probability of 64/256 resulting in the CZ state, a probability of 48/256 resulting in the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 10/256 resulting in the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 6/256 resulting in the AT state.

Similarly, when a special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, a lottery is held with a probability of 0/256 resulting in a miss, a probability of 64/256 resulting in a CZ state, a probability of 64/256 resulting in a red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 64/256 resulting in a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 64/256 resulting in an AT state.

In addition, if the symbol combination "BAR BAR BAR" pseudo-stops during pseudo play in the normal probability state, the CZ state is confirmed at that point, if the symbol combination "red 7 red 7 red 7" pseudo-stops, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that point, if the symbol combination "blue 7 blue 7 blue 7" pseudo-stops, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that point, and if the symbol combination "white 7 white 7 white 7" pseudo-stops, the AT state is confirmed at that point.

Next, FIG. 34(f) shows a lottery table used when a symbol combination capable of awarding a privilege other than the rare symbols described above is formed in a pseudo game during a high probability state.
As shown in Figure 34 (f), when the symbol combination of cherries in the middle row is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, a lottery is held with a probability of 0/256 resulting in a miss, a probability of 128/256 resulting in the CZ state, a probability of 64/256 resulting in the red 7 pseudo bonus state, a probability of 32/256 resulting in the blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and a probability of 32/256 resulting in the AT state.

Similarly, when a special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game, there is a 0/256 probability of a miss, a 0/256 probability of a CZ state, i.e., no CZ state is entered, a 64/256 probability of a red 7 pseudo bonus state is entered, a 96/256 probability of a blue 7 pseudo bonus state is entered, and a 96/256 probability of an AT state is entered.

In addition, if the symbol combination "BAR BAR BAR" pseudo-stops during pseudo play in a high probability state, the CZ state is confirmed at that point, if the symbol combination "red 7 red 7 red 7" pseudo-stops, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that point, if the symbol combination "blue 7 blue 7 blue 7" pseudo-stops, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that point, and if the symbol combination "white 7 white 7 white 7" pseudo-stops, the AT state is confirmed at that point.

As described above, when a rare combination is won in a normal game and in a pseudo game, a lottery is held to determine whether a special bonus will be awarded when a middle cherry or special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in a pseudo game. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for a special bonus even when a pseudo game is played in addition to a normal game.

In addition, since the probability of receiving a bonus is higher overall in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation when the high probability state is in effect.
Furthermore, when the cherry role is won, in both the normal probability state and the high probability state, if the set value is an even value, the probability of winning the red 7 pseudo bonus state is higher than when the set value is an odd value, and if the set value is an odd value, the probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo bonus state is higher than when the set value is an even value. For example, the manner in which the bonus is awarded changes depending on whether the set value is even or odd, so that a wider variety of bonus award modes can be created, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, when the watermelon role is won, the lottery is held in such a way that the red 7 pseudo bonus state and AT state are not awarded in both the normal probability state and the high probability state, so the balance of profit between the gaming facility and the player can be adjusted, and when a bonus is awarded, there is a high probability that the relatively advantageous blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be awarded, so it is also possible to give players a certain sense of expectation.

In addition, the higher the setting value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability of receiving a bonus, so if the setting value is relatively high, it is possible to further increase the player's expectations.

In addition, in pseudo play, in addition to winning the rare roles mentioned above, a special lottery for a bonus is also held when a middle cherry or a special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped, and since the special lottery is more favorable to the player than when a rare role is won, it is possible to further increase the player's expectations when pseudo play is executed.
In particular, when a special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped or when a symbol combination of cherries in the middle row is pseudo-stopped under a high probability condition, the award of a bonus is confirmed, which can greatly heighten the player's expectations.

In addition, when the symbol combinations "BAR BAR BAR", "red 7 red 7 red 7", "blue 7 blue 7 blue 7" and "white 7 white 7 white 7" are simulated to stop during the simulated game, the corresponding bonus is awarded without a lottery. This not only heightens the player's expectations, but also makes the game during the simulated game more innovative and different from a regular game, making it possible to greatly increase the interest of the game.

When a bonus is awarded in a normal game, consecutive effects, premonition effects, etc. are executed before the bonus is awarded, so even if it is decided to award a bonus in a pseudo game, consecutive effects, premonition effects, etc. may be executed as in a normal game, and then the game state may be transitioned to that which is advantageous to the corresponding player, or in a pseudo game, consecutive effects, premonition effects, etc. may not be executed, and the game state may be transitioned to that which is advantageous to the player from the game next to the game in which the pseudo game is executed.

In addition, if it is decided that a bonus will be awarded in the pseudo game, the aforementioned individual presentation may be executed in the actual game that is executed immediately after the pseudo game in the same game, and a result may be derived that finally notifies the player that a bonus will be awarded in this individual presentation. In this case, for example, even if a rare combination is won in the pseudo game but the bonus is not awarded, it is preferable to ultimately execute an individual presentation in the actual game that notifies the player that a bonus will not be awarded.

However, when the symbol combinations "BAR BAR BAR", "red 7 red 7 red 7", "blue 7 blue 7 blue 7" and "white 7 white 7 white 7" are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, the award of the bonus is confirmed, so it is preferable to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the corresponding player from the game next to the game in which the pseudo game is executed. In this case, the game executed immediately after the pseudo game may transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.
As described above, a prize lottery is conducted in the normal game and the pseudo game.

[Lottery table used during CZ state in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to Figure 35, we will explain the control related to the CZ state in the main control device in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

First, Figure 35 (a) shows a lottery table used to determine the number of games that will determine the duration of the CZ state if a transition to the CZ state is won in the above-mentioned bonus lottery.
In addition, the number of games in the CZ state is determined differently depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, the number of games in the CZ state may be determined at the time when the transition to the CZ state is won in the aforementioned bonus lottery, or at the start of the game in which the transition to the CZ state actually takes place.
In addition, various lotteries related to the CZ state are conducted by the main control unit 10 by drawing predetermined random numbers, and in Figure 35, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is 256, and the number of random number values when each lottery result is determined is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, and 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, and 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, and 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, and 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, and 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the CZ state as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, and 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Since the number of games in the CZ state is determined by the above-mentioned probability, the number of continuing games in the CZ state will be either 5, 10, or 15 games, and the duration of the CZ state, during which anticipation of receiving a special bonus increases, will change.
In addition, it becomes possible to change the number of games in the CZ state depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to create a wider variety of execution patterns for the CZ state.

In addition, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is an even number, the probability that a relatively short duration such as 5 or 10 games will be selected is higher than when the setting value is an odd number, and conversely, when the setting value is an odd number, the probability that the maximum duration of 15 games will be selected is higher than when the setting value is an even number.
Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a characteristic CZ state depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game and also makes it possible to adjust the profit balance between the gaming facility and the player by using the probability setting device 14.

Next, Figure 35 (b) shows a lottery table used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game in a game during the CZ state.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, during a game in the CZ state, a lottery is held for a special bonus (pseudo bonus state) when a specified role (push order bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won.
When a bonus is awarded, a pseudo-game is executed in the game during the CZ state, and it is notified that a bonus will be awarded in that pseudo-game.

Specifically, if a specific role (push order bell role, common bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and if it is decided to execute a pseudo game, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to grant a special bonus.

Therefore, for a bonus to be awarded during the CZ state, both of the above two lotteries must be won. Even if a pseudo-game is played during the CZ state, a bonus will not necessarily be awarded, and even if a pseudo-game is played, it may end without awarding a bonus.
Furthermore, unlike pseudo-game during the normal game state, pseudo-game during the CZ state is executed to notify whether or not a special prize will be awarded, and therefore pseudo-game does not result in a pseudo-winning of a specified winning combination.

The winning of the role that triggered the special prize draw will be reflected in the control of reel 4 during the actual game that is executed immediately after the pseudo game. Therefore, for example, if a cherry role is won in a specified game during the CZ state, the pseudo game is executed first, and then during the actual game immediately thereafter, the reel 4 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role can be formed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an individual performance for the winning of a rare role during the actual game.

Figure 35 (b) shows a lottery table used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game when a specified role (push order bell role, common bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won in a game during the CZ state.
As shown in Figure 35 (b), when a bell role (push order bell role or common bell role) is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 192/256 that a pseudo game will not be executed and with a probability of 64/256 that a pseudo game will be executed.

Similarly, if the cherry role is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 0/256 that a pseudo game will not be executed and with a probability of 256/256 that a pseudo game will be executed. Therefore, if the cherry role is won, a pseudo game will always be executed.

Similarly, if the watermelon symbol is won in a game during the CZ state, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 64/256 that a pseudo game will not be played and with a probability of 192/256 that a pseudo game will be played.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, the probability of a pseudo-game, which is the trigger for the award of a bonus, being executed is higher when a rare role is won than when a bell role is won during the CZ state.
In particular, if the cherry role is won, a pseudo game is always executed.

Next, FIG. 35(c) shows a lottery table used to determine whether or not to award a bonus when the execution of a pseudo game is decided by the above lottery.

As shown in Figure 35 (c), when a bell role (push order bell role or common bell role) is won in a game during the CZ state and it is decided that a pseudo game will be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 192/256 probability that a fixed pattern row (fixed numbers) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and a 64/256 probability that a fixed pattern row (fixed numbers) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.
Here, the confirmed pattern row (confirmed number), which will be described in detail later, is a pattern row that notifies of a transition to a pseudo bonus state on a specified reel 4 in a pseudo game, and indicates that the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state has been determined.

Similarly, if a cherry role is won in a game during the CZ state and a pseudo game is decided to be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 64/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed number) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and a 192/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed number) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.

Similarly, if the watermelon role is won in a game during the CZ state and a pseudo game is decided to be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 0/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed numbers) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and there is a 256/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed numbers) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, when a pseudo-game is executed during the CZ state, the probability of being awarded a special bonus (pseudo-bonus state) is higher if the winning role that triggers the execution of the pseudo-game is a rare role than if it is a bell role.
Also, if the watermelon role is won during the CZ state, the probability of a pseudo game being executed is lower than if the cherry role is won, but as long as a pseudo game is executed, a bonus will be awarded without fail.

Next, FIG. 35(d) shows a lottery table used to determine the type of benefit to be awarded when the award of a benefit is determined by the above lottery (the determined symbol sequence is pseudo-stopped).
In addition, the bonus awarded during the CZ state is either a red 7 pseudo bonus state or a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and the selection of the type of bonus to be awarded is performed differently depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.

As shown in Figure 35 (d), when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 192/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 64/256.
Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 224/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 32/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 160/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 96/256.
Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 208/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 48/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 128/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 128/256.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 208/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 48/256.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, when it is decided to award a bonus during the CZ state, it is possible to change the type of pseudo-bonus state depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to create a wider variety of bonus awarding patterns.
Furthermore, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is an odd number, the probability of determining the relatively advantageous blue 7 pseudo bonus state is higher than when the setting value is an even number, so it is possible to create a distinctive bonus awarding pattern according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, within each of the odd number group and even number group, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be determined, so that the probability setting device 14 makes it possible to adjust the balance of profits between gaming establishments and players.
As described above, various lotteries are carried out during the CZ state in the third embodiment.

[Effects on the main display when winning the pseudo bonus state during the CZ state in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to Figure 36, we will explain the presentation when the pseudo bonus state is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

As mentioned above, in the third embodiment of the slot machine 1, the main control unit 10 conducts a lottery to determine whether a bonus will be awarded during the CZ state, and if the bonus is awarded, one of the pseudo-bonus states will occur.In this case, a pseudo-game will be executed during the game in which the bonus was awarded.
During this pseudo game, control is performed to pseudo-stop the aforementioned fixed symbol sequence on the reel 4 in order to notify the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state.

Specifically, during the simulated game, control is exercised to pseudo-stop the above-mentioned confirmed pattern sequence on the middle reel 4b, and when the player performs a stopping operation on the middle reel 4b, the confirmed pattern sequence will pseudo-stop on the middle reel 4b.
On the other hand, during a simulated game that is executed when no bonus is awarded, no control is performed to simulate stopping a confirmed pattern sequence on the center reel 4b, and instead a losing pattern sequence, which indicates that no bonus will be awarded, is simulated to stop.

Regarding the losing symbol sequence, any symbol sequence may be used as long as it is recognizable that no special bonus will be awarded. Furthermore, regarding reels 4 other than the middle reel 4b during the simulated game, any symbol sequence may be pseudo-stopped, or only the middle reel 4b may be pseudo-stopped during the simulated game.

FIG. 36 shows an image produced on the main display 8 when a fixed symbol sequence is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game, which is executed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main control unit 10.
In the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment, the above-mentioned confirmed symbol sequence is set to the symbol sequence of the center reel 4b with sequence numbers 10 to 12, namely, “white 7, watermelon, white 7”, but other symbol sequences may also be used.

As shown in Figure 36, when a pseudo game is executed during the CZ state, a confirmed pattern row image 55a is displayed approximately in the center of the screen of the main display device 8.
The confirmed symbol sequence image 55a corresponds to the symbol sequence of the center reel 4b, which is "white 7, watermelon, white 7" and has symbol numbers 10 to 12.
In addition, below the confirmed pattern sequence image 55a, a pseudo stop instruction image 55b consisting of text information such as "Aim!!" and an arrow image 55c indicating the position of the middle reel 4b are displayed, and an effect is executed that encourages the player to perform a stop operation aiming at the pattern sequence of "white 7, watermelon, white 7" with sequence numbers 10 to 12 on the spinning middle reel 4b.

Then, when the player operates the middle stop button 5b as instructed by the presentation to stop the middle reel 4b (pseudo stop operation), if it has been determined in advance that a bonus will be awarded, a confirmed pattern sequence ("white 7, watermelon, white 7") will pseudo-stop on the middle reel 4b.
In this case, no matter when the player operates to stop the center reel 4b, the stop control is performed so that the fixed symbol sequence always stops pseudo-stop.

After the pseudo stop, the player will operate the start button to cause reel 4 to spin again and the game will move on to the main game. During the game, an image will be displayed indicating a type of pseudo bonus state that has been determined in advance (see Figure 35 (d)), although this is not shown in the figure.
For example, if the occurrence of the red 7 pseudo bonus state is determined, text information such as "red 7 pseudo bonus state start" is displayed during the game.

Then, the corresponding pseudo bonus state occurs from the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo game is executed.
In addition, during the first game of the pseudo bonus state that has occurred as described above, a pseudo game may be executed in which the symbol combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" or "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" is temporarily stopped. In this case, since the main game immediately after the pseudo game is already a game in the pseudo bonus state, if the push order bell role is won, the push order navigation will be executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a pseudo game in which the awarding of a bonus has not been determined in advance, even if a stopping operation (pseudo stopping operation) is performed on the middle reel 4b, the confirmed pattern row will not pseudo-stop, and a losing pattern row will pseudo-stop on the middle reel 4b.
If there are remaining games in the CZ state, the game in the CZ state will be played again from the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo game is played.

As described above, when a pseudo-game is executed during the CZ state, a presentation is executed on the main display 8 to encourage a pseudo-stop of a confirmed pattern row, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game during the CZ state.
Furthermore, if it is decided that a bonus will be awarded during the CZ state, then if the stopping operation is performed in accordance with the presentation that prompts a pseudo-stop of the confirmed pattern row, the confirmed pattern row will pseudo-stop, giving the player the feeling that a bonus has been obtained through his or her own operation, and making it possible to provide the player with a high level of satisfaction.

In addition, when a pseudo game is executed during the CZ state, if a predetermined time (e.g., one minute) has passed without the player performing a stopping operation on the middle reel 4b, any of the predetermined pattern sequences may be automatically pseudo-stopped, or after the predetermined time has passed, the presentation encouraging the pseudo-stop of the confirmed pattern sequence may be terminated, and the pseudo game may be stopped and the game may automatically transition to the main game.
As described above, the effects during pseudo play in the CZ state are performed in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Addition point lottery table used to determine the addition points when drawing the AT state during the pseudo bonus state in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the lottery for the AT state during the pseudo bonus state executed by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, when a transition is made from the normal game state or the CZ state to the pseudo bonus state, a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state, and if the transition lottery to the AT state is won, the game state will transition to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends.

The lottery for transition to the AT state is carried out based on points that are added according to the lottery results of the winning combination in the game during the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, the lottery is carried out so that the more points are added during the pseudo bonus state, the higher the probability of transitioning to the AT state.

FIG. 37 shows a lottery table used to determine whether or not to add points related to the lottery for transitioning to the AT state when a winning combination is achieved in a game during the pseudo bonus state.
The points are set to an initial value (0) at the start of the pseudo bonus state, and the added value of the points is set to 1 to 3 points for each game.
In addition, the point addition lottery is conducted by the main control unit 10 by drawing a predetermined random number, and in Figure 37, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is 256, and the number of random number values when each lottery result is determined is shown.

First, FIG. 37(a) shows a lottery table used in the lottery for adding points during the red 7 pseudo bonus state that continues for 30 games.
37(a), in a game during the red 7 pseudo bonus state, when a replay role is won, one point is added with a probability of 256/256. Therefore, when a replay role is won, a lottery is conducted in which one point is always added and no other points are added.

Similarly, if the cherry role is won, there is a 192/256 probability of 2 points being added, and a 64/256 probability of 3 points being added. Therefore, when the cherry role is won, a lottery is held to ensure that either 2 or 3 points are added, and that 1 point is not added.

Similarly, when the watermelon role is won, 2 points are added with a probability of 128/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held so that either 2 points or 3 points are added, and 1 point is not added.
In addition, if you win the bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) during a game in the red 7 pseudo bonus state, no points will be added.

Next, FIG. 37(b) shows a lottery table used when drawing the points addition lottery during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state that continues for 20 games.
37(b), in a game during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, if a bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) is won, 1 point is added with a probability of 240/256, and 2 points are added with a probability of 216/256. Therefore, when a bell role is won, a lottery is held so that either 1 point or 2 points are added, but 3 points are not added.

Similarly, if the cherry role is won, there is a 192/256 probability of 2 points being added, and a 64/256 probability of 3 points being added. Therefore, when the cherry role is won, a lottery is held to ensure that either 2 or 3 points are added, and that 1 point is not added.

Similarly, when the watermelon role is won, 2 points are added with a probability of 128/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held so that either 2 points or 3 points are added, and 1 point is not added.
In addition, if a replay role is won during a game in the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, no points will be added.

Since points during each pseudo bonus state are added up through the above-described lottery, if a rare role is won in a game during the pseudo bonus state, more points will be added up.
In addition, since the probability of winning a bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) is set higher than the probability of winning a replay role, the lottery is held so that the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, in which the bell role is the role that triggers point addition, will have a higher total point value than the Red 7 pseudo bonus state.
In other words, the blue 7 pseudo bonus state is set to be more advantageous than the red 7 pseudo bonus state.

Then, the main control device 10 executes a lottery for transition to the AT state based on the total value of points added during the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the transition lottery to the AT state by the main control device 10 is executed so that the probability of winning the AT state increases as the total points increase, and for example, a transition lottery is executed so that the probability of winning the AT state increases by 5% for each point.
In addition, when the total points are 0 points or 20 points or more, a transition lottery is held to win the AT state unconditionally.
It is preferable that the total value of the above points is notified during the pseudo bonus state.

Therefore, if a player wins a role that triggers point addition during each pseudo-bonus state, it is possible to increase the player's expectations, and in particular, if a player wins a rare role, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even further.
In addition, since the probability of transitioning to the AT state is higher when a blue 7 pseudo bonus state occurs than when a red 7 pseudo bonus state occurs, it is possible to create an interesting pseudo bonus state occurrence mode that can change the player's sense of expectation depending on the type of pseudo bonus state that occurs, and when a blue 7 pseudo bonus state occurs, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in the next game after the pseudo bonus state ends, a pseudo game is executed to notify the result of the lottery to transition to the AT state, and the result of the lottery to transition to the AT state is notified by the pseudo stopping pattern on reel 4.
For example, when a transition to the AT state occurs after the pseudo bonus state ends, a pseudo game is executed in the first game of the AT state, and during that pseudo game, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" pseudo-stops on reel 4, and it is announced that the transition to the AT state has occurred.
On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus state ends and the game transitions to a normal game state in which the advantageous zone continues, a pseudo game is executed in the first game of the normal game state, and during that pseudo game, a symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" is pseudo-stopped on reel 4, and it is notified that the game did not transition to the AT state.
Therefore, even when the pseudo bonus state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, the pseudo game will be executed in part of the game, so that it becomes possible to execute a first game in which no pseudo game is executed and a first game in which a pseudo game is executed, thereby increasing the player's expectations, and a wider variety of games can be executed.
In addition, the pseudo game for notifying the result of the lottery for transition to the AT state may be executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus state ends, or may be executed in the final game of the pseudo bonus state. In this case, if the AT state is transitioned to after the pseudo bonus state ends, a pseudo game is executed in which the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" can be pseudo-stopped in the final game, and if the AT state is not transitioned to after the pseudo bonus state ends, a pseudo game is executed in which the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" can be pseudo-stopped in the final game.
In addition, a result game (result notification game) that is completed in one game may be executed in the final game of the pseudo bonus state or the next game after the pseudo bonus state ends, and a notification regarding the transition to the AT state may be made by executing a pseudo game in this result game.
As described above, a lottery for transition to the AT state during the pseudo bonus state in the third embodiment is executed.

[Effects on the main display when the AT state starts after the pseudo bonus state ends in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to Figure 38, when a transition to an AT state occurs after the pseudo bonus state ends, the effects on the main display 8 that are executed during pseudo play in the first game of the AT state will be described.

As mentioned above, if the AT state is selected through a lottery to transition to the AT state based on the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state, a pseudo game is played in the first game of the AT state, and the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is pseudo-stopped by the player's stop operation. If the AT state is not selected, a pseudo game is played in the first game of the normal game state in which the advantageous zone continues, and the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" is pseudo-stopped by the player's stop operation. During this pseudo game, an effect is played on the main display 8 to encourage the pseudo stop of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7".

Figure 38 shows a presentation image on the main display 8 when the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is pseudo-stopped during the above-mentioned pseudo game, which is executed by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main control unit 10.
As shown in FIG. 38, when the first game in the AT state is executed, a confirmed symbol combination image 56a is displayed substantially in the center of the screen of the main display device 8.
The confirmed symbol combination image 56 a is an image corresponding to the symbol combination of “white 7, white 7, white 7” stopping on a predetermined line on the reel 4 .

In addition, a pseudo stop instruction image 55b consisting of text information such as "Aim!!" is displayed below the confirmed pattern combination image 56a, and an effect is executed to encourage a stopping operation aimed at the pattern combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" on the rotating reel 4.
In addition, an acquired points image 56b, which is the total number of points referenced in the current AT state transition lottery, is displayed above the confirmed symbol combination image 56a.
In addition, FIG. 38 illustrates an example of an acquired point image 56b in which 7 points have been added.

Then, when the player operates each stop button 5 as instructed by the presentation to stop the reel 4 (pseudo stop operation), if a transition to the AT state has been determined in advance, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" will pseudo-stop on the reel 4.
In this case, no matter when the player operates to stop the reel 4, the reel is stopped in such a manner that the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" always stops pseudo-stop.

After the pseudo stop, the reel 4 spins again when the player performs a start operation, transitioning to the main game and the first game in the AT state is executed.
During the game, an image (not shown) will be displayed to notify the start of the AT state, and text information such as "AT state confirmed" or "AT state start" will be displayed.
If the push order bell role is won, the push order navigation will be executed (displayed) along with the above text information during this game.

On the other hand, even if the game state transitions to the normal game state after the pseudo bonus state ends, the pseudo game is executed in the first game of the normal game state, and the same effects as those described above are executed.
However, in this case, even if the player performs the stopping operation as instructed, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" will be pseudo-stopped on reel 4 during the pseudo-play, and the player will be notified that the AT state has not been entered.

As described above, a pseudo game is executed in the next game after the pseudo bonus state ends, and an effect is executed on the main display 8 that encourages the pseudo stopping of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7," thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
Furthermore, when a transition to the AT state is decided during the pseudo bonus state, if the player performs the stopping operation in accordance with the presentation that prompts the pseudo stopping of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7," the corresponding symbol combination will pseudo-stop, giving the player the feeling that a special benefit has been obtained through his/her own operation, and thus making it possible to give the player a high sense of satisfaction.

In addition, if a predetermined time (e.g., one minute) passes during the pseudo-game after the pseudo-bonus state ends without the player performing any operation to stop reel 4, any of the predetermined pattern combinations may be automatically pseudo-stopped, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the presentation encouraging the pseudo-stop of that pattern combination may be terminated, and the pseudo-game may be stopped and the game may automatically transition to the main game.
As described above, the pseudo-game effect is performed after the pseudo bonus state ends in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used when transitioning to a specialized zone during an AT state in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the lottery for the specialized zone during the AT state executed by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, the main control unit 10 conducts a transition lottery to determine whether or not a specialized zone will be generated during the AT state when a specified role is won, and if the transition lottery to the specialized zone is won, a specified period during the AT state will be controlled as a specialized zone.
During this specialized zone, a lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is executed, and if the lottery for transition to the pseudo bonus state is won, the AT state is temporarily interrupted and the game state transitions to the pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is carried out not only during the normal game in the AT state, but also during the pseudo game in the AT state described below.

FIG. 39 shows a lottery table used when drawing a transition lottery for a specialized zone in a normal game and pseudo game during the AT state.
In addition, in the pseudo-game during the AT state, since no role corresponding to the push order bell role is set, when a symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is formed on reel 4, it is determined that the common bell role has been won in all cases.

As shown in FIG. 39, when a common bell role is won in a normal game or pseudo game during the AT state, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 240/256 that there will be no transition to the specialized zone, and with a probability of 16/256 that there will be a transition to the specialized zone.
Similarly, when the cherry role is won, a lottery is held to determine that there is a 192/256 probability of not moving to the specialized zone and a 64/256 probability of moving to the specialized zone.
Similarly, if the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held to determine that there is a 224/256 probability of not moving to the specialized zone and a 32/256 probability of moving to the specialized zone.

As described above, since a lottery is conducted to determine whether a player will enter a specialized zone during the AT state, the probability of winning the specialized zone changes depending on the result of the lottery, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of playing during the AT state.
Furthermore, when a rare symbol is won, the probability of moving to a specialized zone, which is the trigger for a transition to a pseudo-bonus state, increases, thereby heightening the player's sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-game that is executed during the AT state, the formation of a symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is enough to determine that the common bell role, which is the role that triggers the transition lottery to the specialized zone, has been won, so when the pseudo-game is executed during the AT state, it is possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation.
As described above, a transition lottery for the specialized zone is executed during the AT state in the third embodiment.

[Determination process of pseudo stop pattern sequence when using AT table in AT state in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the determination control of the result of the pseudo game in the AT state, that is, the symbol combination derived when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped during the game, will be described.

As described above, during normal game play, a pseudo game is executed in a specified game, and the symbol sequence to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during the pseudo game is determined using one of a plurality of pseudo game tables.
In the slot machine 1 of this third embodiment, the main control device 10 is capable of executing pseudo-game even during the AT state, and during the AT state, a pseudo stopping pattern sequence for each reel 4 is determined using an AT table dedicated to the AT state.

The results of the pseudo-game during the AT state are linked to the lottery for the specialized zone during the AT state, as mentioned above, so when a pseudo-game is performed during the AT state, the expectation of the occurrence of the specialized zone increases.

During the normal game state, a process for determining a pseudo stopping pattern sequence is carried out each time the common bell role is won in a normal game, and one pseudo game is executed when the common bell role is won a total of three times. However, during the AT state, in addition to the common bell role, a process for determining a pseudo stopping pattern sequence is also carried out when the push order bell role is won, and one pseudo game is executed when the common bell role and the push order bell role are won a total of three times.
Therefore, during the AT state, pseudo games are executed more frequently than during the normal gaming state.

Figure 40 shows the symbol sequence that is to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game and the selection probability of each symbol sequence, which are determined in advance when the common bell role and the push order bell role are won in a state where the AT table is selected as the pseudo game table (AT state).

Figure 40(a) shows the symbol rows that can be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during pseudo play when using the AT table, and the boxes 1 to 4 shown on each reel 4 are the symbol row options at the time of pseudo stop, and each symbol within the box becomes the symbol row that is displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in pseudo play. Also, Figure 40(b) shows the selection probability values of the AT table when selecting the symbol row (boxes 1 to 4) on each reel 4 when the common bell role and push order bell role are won.

As a result of the pseudo game, the options that can be selected are only four types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown in the figure, and other symbol rows cannot be selected.
Therefore, the result of the pseudo game is derived from the combination of the above-mentioned four types of predetermined pattern strings, and these options are set to have characteristics for each pseudo game table. When a table during AT is selected, other than a miss, only the replay role, the bell role, and the cherry role can result in a pseudo win, and the other roles cannot result in a pseudo win.
The selection of the pattern row on each reel 4 is performed by the main control unit 10 by drawing random numbers for the pattern row selection. In Figure 40, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random number values when each pattern row is selected is shown.

As shown in Figures 40(a) and (b), when the AT table is selected as the pseudo game table, when either the common bell role or the push order bell role is won for the first time, the left 1st slot ("Replay Bell Blue 7") is selected with a probability of 80/256, the left 2nd slot ("Replay Bell White 7") is selected with a probability of 80/256, the left 3rd slot ("Bell BAR Cherry") is selected with a probability of 16/256, and the left 4th slot ("Replay Bell Blank") is selected with a probability of 80/256 as the symbol sequence when the left reel 4a is pseudo stopped in the pseudo game.

Similarly, when either the common bell role or the push order bell role is won for the second time, the symbol sequence when center reel 4b is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game is selected in middle slot 1 ("Bell Replay Cherry") with a probability of 80/256, middle slot 2 ("Red 7 Bell Replay") with a probability of 80/256, middle slot 3 ("Bell Replay Cherry") with a probability of 16/256, and middle slot 4 ("BAR Bell Replay") with a probability of 80/256.

Similarly, when either the common bell role or the push order bell role is won for the third time, the symbol sequence when the right reel 4c is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game will be selected in the right 1 slot ("Blue 7, bell, replay") with a probability of 80/256, the right 2 slot ("Bell, replay, watermelon") with a probability of 80/256, the right 3 slot ("White 7, bell, replay") with a probability of 16/256, and the right 4 slot ("Replay, blank, bell") with a probability of 80/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of the pseudo stop in the pseudo game during the AT state.
For example, if the left 1 slot is selected on the left reel 4a, the middle 2 slot is selected on the middle reel 4b, and the right 3 slot is selected on the right reel 4c, then as a result of the simulated game, "Bell Bell Bell" will stop on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning bell role will be determined in advance.

In the normal game state, a preview effect is executed and the determined pseudo game pattern combination is displayed (previewed) in advance on the main display 8 using a preview reel image, whereas in the AT state, since pseudo games are frequently executed, the preview effect is not executed to avoid complexity, but the preview effect may be executed in the AT state as well as in the normal game state.
Then, in the next game during the AT state in which the symbol combination of the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination stops when the reel 4 is pseudo stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when the AT table is selected (AT state), so that when the AT table is selected, the result of the pseudo game is determined so that only the replay role, the bell role, or the cherry role can result in a pseudo win.
Therefore, when a pseudo game is executed during the AT state, it becomes possible to pseudo-win the bell and cherry symbols, which trigger the selection of the specialized zone, thereby increasing the probability of the specialized zone occurring and heightening the player's sense of anticipation.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game is determined when an AT table in the AT state in the third embodiment is selected.

[Lottery table used during specialized zone in main control device in third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the control relating to the specialized zone during the AT state in the main control device in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

First, Figure 41 (a) shows a lottery table used to determine the number of games, which is the duration of the specialized zone, if a transition to the specialized zone is won in the transition lottery to the specialized zone during the AT state described above.
In addition, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined differently depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.
In addition, the number of games to be played in the specialized zone may be determined at the time when the transition to the specialized zone is won in the transition lottery described above, or at the start of the game in which the transition to the specialized zone actually takes place.

In addition, various lotteries related to specialized zones are conducted by the main control device 10 by drawing predetermined random numbers, and in Figure 41, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers when each lottery result is determined is shown.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, and 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, and 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, a lottery will be held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, or 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, a lottery is held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, and 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is a setting of 5, a lottery will be held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 192/256, 10 games with a probability of 48/256, or 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, a lottery will be held to determine the number of games in the specialized zone as 5 games with a probability of 168/256, 10 games with a probability of 80/256, or 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Since the number of games in the specialized zone is determined by the above-mentioned probability, the number of continuing games in the specialized zone will be either 5, 10, or 15 games, and the duration of the specialized zone, during which anticipation of receiving a special benefit (pseudo bonus state) increases, will change.
In addition, it becomes possible to change the number of games in the specialized zone depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to create a wider variety of execution patterns for the specialized zone.

In addition, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is an even number, the probability that a relatively short duration such as 5 or 10 games will be selected is higher than when the setting value is an odd number, and conversely, when the setting value is an odd number, the probability that the maximum duration of 15 games will be selected is higher than when the setting value is an even number.
Therefore, it becomes possible to generate distinctive specialized zones according to the set values in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to increase the interest of the game, and also making it possible to adjust the profit balance between the gaming facility and the player using the probability setting device 14.

Next, FIG. 35(b) shows a lottery table used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game in a game in a specialized zone.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a lottery for a special bonus (pseudo bonus state) is held when a predetermined role (bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won during a game in a specialized zone.
When a bonus is awarded, a pseudo-game is executed in the game in the specialized zone, similar to the CZ state described above, and it is notified that a bonus will be awarded in that pseudo-game.

Specifically, if a specific role (push order bell role, common bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won in a game in the specialized zone, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and if it is decided to execute a pseudo game, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to grant a special bonus.

Therefore, during the specialized zone, just as during the CZ state, in order for a bonus to be awarded, both of the above two lotteries must be won, and even if a pseudo-game is performed during the specialized zone, a bonus will not necessarily be awarded, and even if a pseudo-game is performed, it may end without awarding a bonus.
Furthermore, unlike pseudo-games during normal game play, pseudo-games during specialized zones are executed to notify players of whether or not a special bonus will be awarded, and therefore pseudo-games do not result in pseudo-winning of a specific winning combination.

The winning of the role that triggered the prize draw will be reflected in the control of reel 4 during the actual game that is executed immediately after the pseudo game. Therefore, for example, if a cherry role is won in a specified game in the specialized zone, the pseudo game is executed first, and then during the actual game immediately thereafter, the reel 4 is controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role can be formed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an individual performance for the winning of a rare role during the actual game.

Figure 41 (b) shows a lottery table used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game when a specified role (push order bell role, common bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won in a game in a specialized zone.
As shown in FIG. 41(b), when a bell role (push order bell role or common bell role) is won in a game in a specialized zone, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 192/256 that a pseudo game will not be executed and with a probability of 64/256 that a pseudo game will be executed.

Similarly, if a cherry role is won in a game in the specialized zone, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 0/256 that a pseudo game will not be played and with a probability of 256/256 that a pseudo game will be played. Therefore, if a cherry role is won, a pseudo game will always be played.

Similarly, if the watermelon symbol is won in a game in the specialized zone, a lottery is held to determine with a probability of 64/256 that a pseudo game will not be played and with a probability of 192/256 that a pseudo game will be played.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, the probability of executing a pseudo game, which is the trigger for granting a bonus, is higher when a rare symbol is won in a specialized zone than when a bell symbol is won.
In particular, if the cherry role is won, a pseudo game is always executed.

Next, FIG. 41(c) shows a lottery table used to determine whether or not to award a bonus when the execution of a pseudo game is decided by the above lottery.

As shown in FIG. 41(c), when a bell role (push order bell role or common bell role) is won in a game in a specialized zone and a pseudo game is decided to be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 192/256 probability that a fixed pattern sequence (fixed numbers) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and there is a 64/256 probability that a fixed pattern sequence (fixed numbers) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.
Here, the confirmed pattern row (confirmed number) is a pattern row that, similar to during the CZ state, notifies of a transition to a pseudo bonus state on a specified reel 4 in a pseudo game, and indicates that the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state has been determined.

Similarly, if a cherry role is won in a game in the specialized zone and a pseudo game is decided to be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 64/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed number) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and a 192/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed number) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.

Similarly, if the watermelon symbol is won in a game in the specialized zone and a pseudo game is decided to be played, a lottery is held so that there is a 0/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed numbers) will not be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game, and a 256/256 probability that a fixed symbol sequence (fixed numbers) will be pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, when a pseudo-game is played in a specialized zone, the probability of being awarded a special bonus (pseudo-bonus state) is higher if the winning symbol that triggers the pseudo-game is a rare symbol than if it is a bell symbol.
Also, if the watermelon role is won during the specialized zone, the probability of a pseudo game being executed is lower than if the cherry role is won, but as long as a pseudo game is executed, a bonus is always awarded.

Next, FIG. 41(d) shows a lottery table used to determine the type of benefit to be awarded when the award of a benefit is determined by the above lottery (the determined symbol sequence is pseudo-stopped).
The bonus awarded during the specialized zone is either a red 7 pseudo bonus state or a blue 7 pseudo bonus state, and the selection of the type of bonus to be awarded is performed differently depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14.

As shown in Figure 41 (d), when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 192/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 64/256.
Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 2, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 224/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 32/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 3, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 160/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 96/256.
Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 4, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 208/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 48/256.

Similarly, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 128/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 128/256.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, a lottery is held to determine that a red 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 208/256, and that a blue 7 pseudo bonus state will occur with a probability of 48/256.

Because the lottery is conducted as described above, when it is decided to award a bonus in a specialized zone, it is possible to change the type of pseudo-bonus state depending on the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to create a wider variety of bonus awarding patterns.
Furthermore, when the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is an odd number, the probability of determining the relatively advantageous blue 7 pseudo bonus state is higher than when the setting value is an even number, so it is possible to create a distinctive bonus awarding pattern according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, within each of the odd and even number groups, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be determined, so the probability setting device 14 makes it possible to adjust the balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player.

If, as a result of the above lottery, it is decided that a pseudo-game will be executed during the specialized zone, a pseudo-game that can notify whether or not a special prize will be awarded will be executed during the game in which the lottery trigger role is won, in the same way as in the CZ state described above.

Also, during simulated play in the specialized zone, similar to the CZ state described above (see Figure 36), the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main control unit 10 will control a presentation related to the pseudo stopping of a confirmed pattern row on the main display 8.
In addition, the presentation during the simulated gameplay in the specialized zone is the same as that in the CZ state described above, so no explanation will be given here.

If the pseudo bonus state is won, control is performed to pseudo-stop the confirmed symbol row on the center reel 4b during the pseudo play in the specialized zone, and one of the selected types of pseudo bonus states will occur from the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo play was executed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus state has been won, even if a stopping operation (pseudo stopping operation) is performed on the middle reel 4b, the confirmed pattern row will not be pseudo-stopped, and a losing pattern row will be pseudo-stopped on the middle reel 4b.
If there are games remaining in the specialized zone, the games in the specialized zone will be played again from the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo game is played.
During the pseudo game, when the reels 4 other than the center reel 4b are pseudo-stopped, any pattern row may be displayed, but the reels 4 other than the center reel 4b may be made unable to pseudo-stop.
As described above, various lotteries are carried out in the specialized zone in the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used to determine the number of added games in the AT state in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, an explanation will be given of the lottery for adding the number of games during a pseudo bonus state that occurs as a result of a specialized zone in the main control device in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

As mentioned above, during the AT state, a specialized zone occurs when certain conditions are met, but during the pseudo bonus state that occurs as a result of this specialized zone, unlike during the pseudo bonus state that occurs during the normal game mode, a lottery is held to add a certain number of games to the number of remaining games in the AT state.

The additional lottery during the pseudo bonus state is carried out based on the lottery results of the roles in each game during the pseudo bonus state, and the lottery trigger roles and winning probabilities are set to be different for each type of pseudo bonus state.
In addition, the additional lottery is conducted by the main control unit 10 by drawing random numbers for the additional lottery, and in Figure 42, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is 256, and the number of random number values when each lottery result is determined is shown.

First, Figure 42 (a) shows an additional lottery table used during the red 7 pseudo bonus state that occurs during the AT state.
42(a), in a game during the red 7 pseudo bonus state, when a replay role is won, a lottery is performed in which 0 games (no added games) is selected with a probability of 128/256, and 10 games is selected with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when a replay role is won, the added games of 20 games or 30 games are not selected.

Similarly, in a game during the Red 7 pseudo bonus state, if a Cherry role is won, a lottery is held to select the number of added games as follows: 0 games (no added) with a probability of 0/256, 10 games with a probability of 86/256, 20 games with a probability of 85/256, or 30 games with a probability of 85/256. Therefore, if a Cherry role is won, some number of games will always be added.

Similarly, in a game during the red 7 pseudo bonus state, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is held in which the number of added games is selected as 0 games (no added games) with a probability of 0/256, 10 games with a probability of 128/256, 20 games with a probability of 0/256, or 30 games with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, either 10 games or 30 games will always be added.
Also, even if you win a bell role (common bell role or push order bell role) during the red 7 pseudo bonus state, the number of games will not be added.

Next, Figure 42 (b) shows an additional lottery table used during the blue 7 pseudo bonus state that occurs during the AT state.
42(b), in the game during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, when the bell role (common bell role and push order bell role) is won, the number of added games is selected as 0 games (no added) with a probability of 128/256, and 10 games with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the bell role is won, the number of added games of 20 games or 30 games is not selected.

Similarly, when a Cherry role is won in a game during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, a lottery is held in which the number of added games is selected as follows: 0 games (no added games) with a probability of 0/256, 10 games with a probability of 0/256, 20 games with a probability of 128/256, or 30 games with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when a Cherry role is won, either 20 games or 30 games will always be added.

Similarly, when the watermelon role is won in a game during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, a lottery is held in which the number of added games is selected as follows: 0 games (no added) with a probability of 0/256, 10 games with a probability of 64/256, 20 games with a probability of 0/256, and 30 games with a probability of 192/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, either 10 games or 30 games will be added without fail.
Also, even if you win a replay during the Blue 7 pseudo bonus state, the number of games will not be added.

The number of added games determined by the additional lottery in each game during the pseudo bonus state is finally totaled at the end of the pseudo bonus state and added to the remaining number of games when the AT state returns.
In addition, when the pseudo bonus state ends and the AT state is restored, it is preferable to notify the total number of games to be added, such as when the first game is played.

As described above, when a pseudo bonus state occurs during an AT state, not only can game value (medals) be obtained by executing the push order navigation during the pseudo bonus state, but the number of remaining games in the AT state also increases, so when a pseudo bonus state occurs during an AT state, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, when a pseudo-bonus state occurs during the AT state, the player's expectations can be heightened. In particular, when a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs, in which an additional draw is conducted when a bell role, which has a higher probability of winning than a replay role, is won, that is, when a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, which is more advantageous than a red 7 pseudo-bonus state, occurs, the possibility of a greater number of games being added increases, which can further heighten the player's expectations.
As described above, an additional lottery is executed during the pseudo bonus state that occurs during the AT state in the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used when determining the concealment notice performance in the sub-control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the concealed notice effect executed by the sub-controller 20 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the main control device 10 executes a pseudo game in a specified game (a three-bet game), but the sub-control device 20 executes a preview performance related to the pseudo game on the main display 8 before the pseudo game is executed.
Furthermore, when the sub-control device 20 executes the above-mentioned preview performance, as described above, a preview reel image is displayed on the main display device 8 to notify (preview) the result of the simulated game in advance, but it is also possible to execute a concealed preview performance in which part or all of this preview reel image is concealed.

Therefore, in a normal preview performance, all of the preview reel images corresponding to each of the reels 4a to 4c are displayed before the pseudo game is executed, and the result of the pseudo game is notified in advance, but when the concealed preview performance is executed, some or all of the preview reel images are concealed (hidden), and because some or all of the results of the pseudo game are not displayed, they are not notified in advance.

In other words, in a normal preview performance, all preview reel images are displayed before the pseudo game is executed, so that all of the results of the pseudo game are displayed in advance (advance notification), but in a concealed preview performance, some or all of the preview reel images are hidden before the pseudo game is executed, so that some or all of the results of the pseudo game cannot be recognized until the pseudo game is actually executed.

FIG. 43 shows a lottery table used in the sub-controller 20 when determining whether or not to execute a concealed preview performance and which preview reel image to hide.
The lottery for the concealed notice performance is carried out on a pseudo gaming table basis that has been determined at that time.
In addition, the lottery for the concealment notice performance is conducted by the sub-control unit 20 by drawing random numbers for the concealment notice performance, and in Figure 43, the range (number) of random number values to be obtained is 256, and the number of random number values when each lottery result is determined is shown.

In addition, in the figure, "no concealment" means that the preview reel images for all reels 4 are displayed by executing the normal preview performance, "all concealment" means that the preview reel images for all reels 4 are not displayed, and for the other items, it means that only the preview reel image for the corresponding reel 4 is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the weak table is selected, a lottery is performed in which no concealment is selected with a probability of 128/256, only the left reel 4a is concealed with a probability of 32/256, only the middle reel 4b is concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are concealed with a probability of 16/256, and all concealment is selected with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the strong table is selected, a lottery is held in which no concealment is selected with a probability of 64/256, only the left reel 4a is concealed with a probability of 64/256, only the middle reel 4b is concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are concealed with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are concealed with a probability of 16/256, and all concealment is selected with a probability of 48/256.

Similarly, when the Gachi table is selected, a lottery is held in which no concealment is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are selected with a probability of 16/256, and all concealment is selected with a probability of 144/256.

Similarly, when any of the Special 1 to Special 3 tables is selected, a lottery is held in which no concealment is selected (no selection) with a probability of 0/256, only the left reel 4a is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are selected with a probability of 16/256, and all concealment is selected with a probability of 160/256.

Since the concealed notice performance is executed based on the above-mentioned lottery, when a notice performance is executed, a part of it will be executed as a concealed notice performance, which diversifies the game content and makes it possible to execute a more entertaining performance.
In addition, when a pseudo game table with a relatively high expectation is selected, the probability of the concealed advance notice performance being executed is higher, so it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation when the concealed advance notice performance is executed.
In particular, when full concealment is selected, the probability that a highly anticipated serious table or special table will be selected increases, making it possible to greatly heighten the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, while the hidden notice performance is being performed, the player's psychology of wanting to see the final result of the performance comes into play, and when the hidden notice performance is performed, there is a high probability that a pseudo gaming table with a high advantage will be selected as described above, which can also increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the concealed notice performance is executed, if a replay role is pseudo-won, the notice performance for the re-pseudo game is not executed as in the case of the re-pseudo game described above, but the notice performance may be executed again just before the re-pseudo game is executed. In this case, the lottery result related to the concealed notice performance selected last time in the re-pseudo game may be used again, or a lottery related to the concealed notice performance may be newly executed, or all notice reel images may be concealed (fully concealed) in the re-pseudo game.
As described above, the lottery for the concealment notice performance in the third embodiment is carried out.

[Hidden notice performance of pseudo game on the main display in the third embodiment (when fully hidden)]
Next, referring to Fig. 44, there is shown an effect image on the main display 8 when a concealed notice effect is executed during execution of a predetermined game (3-bet game) in the normal gaming state described above. In particular, Fig. 44 shows a case where all notice reel images are concealed (full concealment).

The concealed preview performance is basically executed in the same manner as the preview performance described above, using a preview reel image for announcing (predicting) the result of the simulated game in advance, and a result-deriving reel image for executing a pre-performance for determining the result of the simulated game.
However, unlike during the preview performance, when full concealment is selected, the reel images resulting from the execution of the pre-performance and the preview reel images for announcing the predetermined pattern sequence (preview pattern) are all concealed and not displayed.

FIG. 44 shows a state in which the concealed notice performance is being executed when the common bell role has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell role is won a second time.
First, as shown in FIG. 44(a), during a normal preview performance, the common bell role has already been won once, so the left preview reel image 50a of the preview reel image 50 in the upper left corner of the screen is displayed as the pattern row (prediction pattern) determined when the common bell role was won. However, when a concealed preview performance is being executed (when all concealment is selected), this left preview reel image 50a is hidden by the left reel concealed image 53a and is made invisible (non-notification).

Although not shown in the figure, a pre-effect for determining the symbol row of the left preview reel image 50a is executed, and as a result, the derived reel image is also hidden.
Also, each concealment image is a black image, but any image that can conceal the preview reel image may be used.

In other words, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is predetermined by the first common bell role being won after the previous pseudo game has been executed, and normally this predetermined result would be announced by the left preview reel image 50a, but when the concealed preview performance is executed, the predetermined pseudo stopping pattern sequence of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is not announced.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game has been determined in advance, and the results of the other reels 4 have not been determined in advance, so the areas of the center preview reel image 50b and the right preview reel image 50c are blank.

After the first common bell role is won, the game waits for the next common bell role to be won. In a normal game, a medium result derivation reel image 51a, which is used when the second common bell role is won, is displayed on the left side of the screen as a result derivation reel image. However, when the concealment notice performance is being executed (when full concealment is selected), as shown in Figure 44(a), this medium result derivation reel image 51a is hidden by a medium result derivation reel concealment image 53b and is not displayed (not notified).
In other words, by selecting full concealment, the next displayed middle preview reel image 50b will also be concealed, and so naturally the middle result derivation reel concealment image 53b will also be concealed, and the pre-performance for determining the pattern to be displayed on the middle preview reel image 50b will also be concealed.

Next, in Figure 44 (b), after two common bell roles have been won, a predetermined pattern sequence would normally be derived and displayed on the middle result derivation reel image 51a in the pre-performance on the middle result derivation reel image 51a, and the middle preview reel image 50b would be displayed as a result of the pre-performance, but if the concealed preview performance is being executed (when full concealment is selected), this middle preview reel image 50b is hidden by the middle reel concealment image 54a and is not displayed (not notified).

In other words, the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game is predetermined by two common bell wins, and normally this predetermined result would be announced by the middle preview reel image 50b, but when the concealed preview performance is executed, the predetermined pseudo stopping pattern sequence of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game is not announced.

After the second common bell role is won, the game will wait for the next common bell role to be won, just like the first time, and as shown in Figure 44(b), a right result derivation reel image 52, which is normally used when the third common bell role is won, will be displayed on the left side of the screen as a result derivation reel image, but when the concealment notice performance is being executed (when full concealment is selected), this right result derivation reel image 52 is hidden by a right result derivation reel concealment image 53c and is not displayed (non-notification).
Then, when the common bell role is won for the third time, the result of the right reel 4c in the simulated game is determined in advance, as described above. However, if the concealed preview effect is being executed (when full concealment is selected), the pre-effect on the right result derivation reel image 52 and the right preview reel image 50c are concealed and not displayed (non-announcement).

As described above, when the concealed preview performance (full concealment) is executed, all preview reel images are concealed, so that the result of the simulated game is kept secret until the actual simulated game is executed, thereby making it possible to extend the player's sense of anticipation accordingly.
In particular, when full concealment is selected as described above, the probability that a highly anticipated serious table or special table will be selected increases, making it possible to greatly heighten the player's sense of expectation.
As described above, the concealment notice performance (full concealment) of the pseudo game on the main display device in the third embodiment is executed.

[Hidden notice performance of pseudo game on the main display in the third embodiment (when partially hidden)]
Next, referring to Fig. 45, there is shown an effect image on the main display 8 when a concealed notice effect is executed during execution of a predetermined game (3-bet game) in the normal gaming state described above. In particular, Fig. 45 shows a case where the notice reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is concealed (partially concealed) as a part of the notice reel image.

Even when some of the preview reel images are hidden in the concealed preview performance, it is basically executed in the same manner as the preview performance described above, using preview reel images to notify (predict) the result of the pseudo game in advance, and result-deriving reel images that execute a pre-performance to determine the result of the pseudo game.
Unlike the case where all the preview reel images are hidden, only some of the preview reel images are hidden, and the other preview reel images are not hidden and the pattern rows (preview patterns) are displayed.

FIG. 45 shows a state in which the concealed notice performance is being executed when the common bell role has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell role is won a second time.
First, as shown in Figure 45 (a), during a normal preview performance, the common bell role has already been won once, so the left preview reel image 50a of the preview reel image 50 in the upper left corner of the screen will be displayed as the pattern row (prediction pattern) determined when the common bell role was won. However, when a concealed preview performance is being executed in which the preview reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is concealed, this left preview reel image 50a is concealed by the left reel concealment image 53a and is made invisible (non-notification).

Although not shown in the figure, a pre-show is executed to determine the pattern row of the left preview reel image 50a, which results in the derived reel image also being hidden.

In other words, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is predetermined by the first common bell role being won after the previous pseudo game has been executed, and normally this predetermined result would be announced by the left preview reel image 50a. However, when a concealment preview effect is executed which conceals the preview reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a, the predetermined pseudo stopping pattern sequence of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is not announced, just as when full concealment is selected as described above.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game has been determined in advance, and the results of the other reels 4 have not been determined in advance, so the areas of the center preview reel image 50b and the right preview reel image 50c are blank.

In the case of a concealed preview effect in which only the preview reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is concealed, the result-derived reel image and the preview reel image corresponding to the center reel 4b and the right reel 4c are displayed in the same manner as in the preview effect described above (see Figure 24), and finally the result of the pseudo game that has been determined in advance is displayed in preview.

As described above, when a concealed preview effect (partial concealment) is executed in which the preview reel images corresponding to some of the reels 4 are concealed, part of the result of the simulated game is kept secret until the actual simulated game is executed, making it possible to extend the player's anticipation by that amount.
Furthermore, when a symbol combination (so-called Tenpai) that can pseudo-win a predetermined hand is formed by a preview reel image other than the concealed preview reel image, it is possible to extremely heighten the player's sense of expectation and also to attract the player's interest in the concealed preview reel image, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.
As described above, the concealment notice performance (partial concealment) of the pseudo game on the main display device in the third embodiment is executed.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the symbol sequence that is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game is determined when the common bell role is won, but it may also be determined when any other role is won.
In addition, the trigger role for determining the symbol sequence that is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
For example, when a predetermined rare role is won or when a predetermined number of games have been played, the determining role may be changed from the common bell role to a replay role.

In addition, when determining the sequence of symbols that will stop in a simulated game, the sequence is determined in the order of left reel 4a → center reel 4b → right reel 4c, but it may be determined in another order, or may be determined simultaneously for a predetermined number or all of the reels 4.

In addition, the pseudo game is actually executed in the next game after the result of the pseudo game is determined in advance, but the pseudo game may be actually executed after a predetermined number of games have been executed after the result of the pseudo game is determined in advance.
Furthermore, the pseudo game is always executed when the result of the pseudo game is determined in advance, but the pseudo game may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 80% probability).

In addition, if a player is selected to receive a special bonus due to another opportunity during the intermediate stage of the pre-determination of the result of the simulated game, a different bonus may be awarded in addition to the bonus that has been awarded.
For example, if the CZ state is won at an intermediate stage in the pre-determination of the pseudo-game result, the probability of winning from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state may be changed from 30% → 60% → 100% as the stage of the pre-determination of the pseudo-game result progresses.
In addition, if a pseudo bonus state is won at an intermediate stage in the pre-determination of the pseudo game result, the points used in the AT state lottery during the pseudo bonus state may be increased by 1 point → 3 points → 5 points as the stage of the pre-determination of the pseudo game result progresses.
In addition, when the AT state is won at an intermediate stage in the pre-determination of the pseudo game result, 10 games may be added to the remaining number of games in the AT state as the stage of the pre-determination of the pseudo game result advances. In addition, when the AT state is won in a state where all the pseudo game results are pre-determined, the right to generate a specialized zone may be granted.

In addition, the operation of a limiting means (so-called limiter) that limits the total number of medals acquired during a specific game state (pseudo bonus state, AT state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player may be determined in advance, and a pseudo game may be made executable even during the period from this determination during which the limiter is activated (ending AT state), and when a pseudo game is executed during the ending AT state, the pattern combination that is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo game may be set to suggest the set value in the probability setting device 14.
For example, the symbol combination at the time of the pseudo winning may be formed so that the reliability of the suggestive information of the set value in the probability setting device 14 increases in the order of non-rare symbol combination → rare symbol combination → special symbol combination → middle row cherry symbol combination, etc. Furthermore, when the symbol combination of "red 7", "blue 7", and "white 7" is pseudo stopped, the set value in the probability setting device 14 may be notified as it is.

In addition, when a weak table is used, only pattern combinations of miss, replay role, and bell role are derived, but for example, "other than replay, replay, and replay" (so-called replay tenpai miss) may be set as a chance role, and even if this chance role is pseudo-winning, a bonus lottery may be held in the same way as when a rare role is pseudo-winning.
In this way, even if a weak table with a relatively low advantage is selected, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from decreasing.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, only a part of the control of the slot machine 1 is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as that of the first embodiment, so below, only the parts that differ from the first embodiment described above will be explained.

First, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, it is possible to execute a pseudo game, but in the slot machine 1 of this fourth embodiment, it is also possible to execute a pseudo game in the same way as in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

Specifically, in a normal game, the main control device 10 operates the start lever 3 to spin the reel 4, and operates the stop button 5 to stop the spinning reel 4, thereby deriving a single game result; however, in a game in which a simulated game is executed, the game is executed in the second half of the game in the same way as a normal game, but in the first half of the game before the final game result is derived, the game progress is temporarily disabled (the acceptance of each operation is disabled) and the spinning reel 4 is temporarily stopped in a simulated manner during that time, thereby deriving a simulated game result (simulated game result) even in the middle of the game.

In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a special effect control means which, in a specified game, disables operations related to the execution of the game and executes a special effect involving a special variable display by the reel 4 as a variable display means, and then executes a normal variable display by the variable display means.
In other words, when a pseudo game is executed, the progress of the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time during the game, and the reel 4, which is displayed in a variable manner during that time, is pseudo-stopped for a predetermined period of time (special effect), and then the normal game is resumed, thereby allowing multiple game results to be derived by consuming the medals (bet input) required to play one game.
However, in the fourth embodiment, the control for determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game is different from that in the third embodiment, as will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the pseudo game is configured to be capable of generating pseudo games that require a stopping operation (pseudo stopping operation) by the player when deriving the pseudo game result, and pseudo games that do not require a stopping operation (pseudo stopping operation) by the player when deriving the pseudo game result.
In the fourth embodiment, a pseudo game that requires a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) by the player is referred to as an operational pseudo game, and a pseudo game that does not require a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) by the player is referred to as an annunciation pseudo game.

The pseudo game is executed by first operating the start lever 3 to spin the reels 4, and then operating the stop button 5 during the game to pseudo-stop (temporarily stop) the spinning reels 4 and derive the pseudo game result. After the pseudo game result has been derived, the reels 4 are respun by operating the start lever 3 again, and the game is executed in the same way as a regular game.

In addition, in the simulated operation game, it is also possible to derive multiple simulated game results by causing the reel 4 to stop simulatedly for each multiple operation by the player during the game.
After the pseudo-game is completed, the game is played in the same manner as a normal game, and the final game result is determined when the player operates the final stop button 5 to stop the spinning reel 4 (full stop).

Therefore, the period from the initial operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reel 4 is counted as one game, and by performing pseudo-stops of the reel 4 during that time, multiple game results are derived in one game (setting the number of bets for one game).
However, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is stopped as a result of the simulated game (a pseudo winning combination), no medals will be paid out as in a normal game.

On the other hand, the pseudo game with notification is executed by first operating the start lever 3 to spin the reel 4, and then automatically stopping the reel 4 without operating the stop button 5 during the game to derive a pseudo game result. Also, in the case of the pseudo game with notification, the reel 4 is automatically respun without operating the start lever 3 again, and the actual game is executed.

In addition, in the operation pseudo game, a pseudo game result related to the awarding of a bonus is derived in the same way as in a normal game, but in the notification pseudo game, since it is executed to notify the player that the game state will change, no control related to the awarding of a bonus (such as drawing a lottery for a pseudo bonus state) is performed even when the notification pseudo game is executed.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, like the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, push order navigation and color navigation can be implemented.
In other words, in a game in which a pattern combination pattern corresponding to a push order bell role as a first specific stop pattern can be derived on reel 4 as a variable display means, the sub-controller 20 constitutes a first notification means (first stop operation notification means) capable of notifying a player in a recognizable manner of a stop operation pattern (push order navigation) for deriving a first specific stop pattern, and the first notification means is capable of notifying the player of the stop operation sequence for reels 4a to 4c as multiple individual variable display means as the above-mentioned stop operation pattern.

The sub-controller 20 also constitutes a second notification means (second stop operation notification means) capable of notifying the player of a stop operation mode (color navigation) for deriving a second specific stop mode in a game in which a pattern combination mode corresponding to a color bell role as a second specific stop mode can be derive on the reel 4 as a variable display means in a manner that is recognizable to the player, and the second notification means is capable of notifying the player of a stop operation mode for deriving a predetermined pattern on, for example, the left reel 4a as a predetermined individual variable display means as the above-mentioned stop operation mode.

[Timing chart for explaining pseudo-game in the fourth embodiment]
First, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 46, a pseudo game realized by the control of the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the main control device 10 is capable of executing an operation pseudo game and a notification pseudo game as a pseudo game in which multiple game results are derived in one game.

The pseudo-game will be explained below, but first we will explain the pseudo-game operation with reference to Figure 46 (a).

FIG. 46(a) shows, for example, an execution mode of a game in which an operation pseudo game is executed once in a normal gaming state.
First, when the player performs an initial start operation (timing t30) to start the game by operating the start lever 3, a game involving a pseudo-play operation is executed and the reels 4 start to rotate.
In the fourth embodiment, the pseudo operation game is executed in the first half of the game, so that the pseudo operation game is started first when the game is started.
At this time, the rotation start mode of the reel 4 and the mode during rotation are the same as in a normal game, but when a game involving simulated operation starts, the rotation start mode may be different from that of a normal game (for example, a mode in which each reel 4 starts with a predetermined time difference).

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game, it becomes possible to stop reel 4 (pseudo stop), and when the player performs the first stop operation (timing t31) by operating stop button 5 in this state, the reel 4 corresponding to each stop operation will stop, but since the pseudo-play is in progress at this time, reel 4 will be pseudo-stopped.
Then, the result of the first game is derived by the pseudo stopping of reel 4.

In addition, when the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped, in order to distinguish it from a real stop, the reel 4 may be moved up and down in small increments to indicate that a real stop has not yet occurred.
During the execution of the pseudo operation game, it is preferable to output a corresponding sound effect from the speaker 9 and to cause the lamp 11 to emit light in a corresponding light-emitting manner.

Next, a second start operation becomes possible after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-stop of reel 4, and when the second start operation is performed (timing t32), the main game is executed and the rotation of reel 4 begins again.
This game is the same as a normal game, and the reel 4 spins in the same manner as in the normal game.
Therefore, from the time of the initial start operation (timing t30) until the start of the game (while the pseudo-game operation is being executed), the progress of the game is interrupted (inputs related to the execution of the game are invalid).

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second start operation, reel 4 can be stopped, and when the player performs a second stop operation (timing t33) by operating stop button 5 in this state, reel 4 will stop (main stop).
Then, the result of the second game is determined by the final stop of reel 4.
During the operation pseudo game, a presentation corresponding to the pseudo game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17.

The game result in this game is derived based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination drawn at the time of the first start operation (timing t30). Therefore, at the time of the second start operation (timing t32), no lottery for the winning combination is performed.

Next, FIG. 46(b) shows an execution mode of a game in which, for example, the pseudo operation game is executed twice in a normal gaming state.
The main control device 10, details of which will be described later, determines whether or not to execute an operation pseudo-game based on the establishment of certain conditions, and at that time also determines the number of times the operation pseudo-game is to be executed during one game.

FIG. 46(b) shows a mode of game execution when it has been determined by the control of the main control device 10 that the operation pseudo game is to be executed twice in one game.
First, when the player performs an initial start operation (timing t34) to start the game by operating the start lever 3, a game involving a pseudo-play operation is executed and the reels 4 start to rotate.
When the pseudo operation game is executed twice, the pseudo operation game is executed in the first half of the game, just as when it is executed once, so that when the game starts, the first pseudo operation game (pseudo operation game 1) is started first.
As in the case where the pseudo game is executed once, when a game involving a pseudo game is started, the reel 4 may start spinning in a manner different from that of a normal game.

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game, it becomes possible to stop reel 4 (pseudo stop), and when the player performs the first stop operation (timing t35) by operating stop button 5 in this state, the reel 4 corresponding to each stop operation will stop, but since the pseudo operation game is in progress at this time, the first pseudo stop of reel 4 will be performed.
Then, the first pseudo stop of reel 4 determines the result of the first game.

As in the case where the pseudo game is executed once, when the pseudo stop of the reel 4 occurs, in order to differentiate it from the actual stop, the reel 4 may be moved up and down in small increments to indicate that the actual stop has not yet occurred.

Next, a second start operation becomes possible after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first pseudo stop of reel 4, and when the second start operation (timing t36) is performed, a pseudo operation game (pseudo operation game 2) is executed again, and the rotation of reel 4 begins again.

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second start operation, it becomes possible again to stop reel 4 (pseudo stop), and when the player performs a second stop operation (timing t37) by operating stop button 5 in this state, the reel 4 corresponding to each stop operation will stop, but since the pseudo play is still in progress at this time, a second pseudo stop of reel 4 will be performed.
Then, the second pseudo stop of reel 4 determines the second game result.

Next, a third start operation becomes possible after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second pseudo-stop of reel 4, and when the third start operation (timing t38) is performed, the main game is executed and the rotation of reel 4 is started again.

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third start operation, reel 4 can be stopped, and when the player performs a third stop operation (timing t39) by operating stop button 5 in this state, reel 4 will stop (main stop).
The final game result is determined by the actual stopping of reel 4.
During the first and second operation pseudo games, an effect corresponding to the pseudo game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub-display 17.

The game result in this game is derived based on the result of the lottery for the winning combination drawn at the first start operation (timing t34). Therefore, the lottery for the winning combination is not performed at the second and third start operations (timings t46 and t48).
In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a maximum of two pseudo operation games are executed in one game, but it may be possible to execute three or more pseudo operation games.

In the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as described later, each game result (symbol combination) derived at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo operation game is predetermined when the pseudo operation game is executed, and the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped so as to obtain the predetermined symbol combination at the time of the stop operation during the pseudo operation game. At this time, the number of pull-in frames may be increased compared to the normal game to perform the stop control of the reel 4.
Furthermore, if the player does not perform a stop operation for a predetermined period of time while the pseudo game is being played, the reel 4 will automatically stop (pseudo stop) to produce a predetermined pattern combination, and further, if the player does not perform the next start operation for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo stop, the reel 4 will automatically start spinning.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game result derived when reel 4 actually stops in one game by executing the pseudo-game operation, a game result is also derived by the pseudo-stopping of reel 4 during the game, which makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation accordingly.
In addition, since it is possible for the reel 4 to pseudo-stop multiple times in one game, when multiple pseudo-stops are executed, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.
Although the pseudo operation game during the normal gaming state has been described above, the pseudo operation game can also be performed during gaming states other than the normal gaming state (pseudo bonus state, AT state, etc.) in the same way as during the normal gaming state.

Next, the notification pseudo game will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 46(c) shows, for example, the manner in which a game is executed when a notification pseudo game is executed in the first game in which the game state has shifted from the normal game state to the pseudo bonus state.

First, when the player performs the start operation (timing t40) of the first game in which the pseudo bonus state is entered by operating the start lever 3, a game accompanied by a notification pseudo game is executed and the reel 4 starts to rotate.
The notification pseudo game is executed to notify the transition or start of a predetermined game state, so that the notification pseudo game is started first when the game starts.
At this time, the manner in which reel 4 starts to rotate and the manner in which it rotates are the same as in a normal game, but during a game involving a notification pseudo-game, the rotation pattern may be different from that in a normal game (for example, reverse rotation in which the patterns move from bottom to top).

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the game (timing t41), reel 4 will automatically stop, but since the notification pseudo game is in progress at this time, reel 4 will be pseudo-stopped.
That is, in the notification pseudo game, the reel 4 automatically comes to a pseudo stop without the player performing any stopping operation.
Then, as a first game result due to the pseudo-stop of reel 4, a symbol combination (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") indicating the occurrence of a pseudo-bonus state is derived.

During the notification pseudo-game, the stop and start operations are invalid and the game progress is interrupted (frozen state).
Also, at the time of the pseudo stop in the notification pseudo game, the pseudo stop will occur without any up or down movement of reel 4, just as at the time of an actual stop. However, just as in the operation pseudo game, at the time of the pseudo stop of reel 4 in the notification pseudo game, it is also possible to notify that the actual stop has not yet occurred by moving reel 4 up and down in small increments, for example.
During the execution of the notification pseudo game, it is preferable to output a corresponding sound effect from the speaker 9 and to cause the lamp 11 to emit light in a corresponding light-emitting manner.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the pseudo-stop of the reel 4 (timing t42), the reel 4 automatically starts to rotate, and the main game is executed.
That is, in the notification pseudo game, the reel 4 automatically starts to rotate without a start operation by the player.
This game is the same as a normal game, and the game in the pseudo bonus state will start from this game. If the push order bell role is won, the corresponding push order navigation will be executed.
Therefore, from the time of the first start operation (timing t40) until the start of the game (the time while the notification pseudo-game is being executed), the progress of the game is invalidated, and various operational inputs by the player related to the progress of the game are also invalidated.

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second start operation, reel 4 can be stopped, and when the player performs a second stop operation (timing t43) by operating stop button 5 in this state, reel 4 will stop (main stop).
The second game result is then derived when reel 4 comes to a final stop, and the game result in this game is derived based on the result of the combination drawn at the time of the first start operation (timing t40).

In the fourth embodiment, the pseudo-game notification is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, but the pseudo-game notification may also be executed at the start of the CZ state or the AT state.
However, it is preferable that the symbol combination derived by the pseudo stop during the pseudo-play notification at the start of the CZ state or AT state be a different symbol combination from that in the pseudo-bonus state (for example, "BAR, BAR, BAR" or "white 7, white 7, white 7").

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game result derived when reel 4 actually stops in one game by executing the notification pseudo game, a notification regarding a transition in the game state is made by the pseudo stopping of reel 4 during the game, so that it is possible to reliably notify regarding a transition in the game state in a more innovative manner.
The pseudo game is executed in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment as described above.

[Lottery table used when determining occurrence of pseudo operation game in the fourth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the generation control of the pseudo operation game by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described.
The main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment determines whether or not to execute a pseudo-operation game based on the results of a lottery for the role executed for each game, and Figure 47 shows a lottery table used to determine the occurrence (execution) of the pseudo-operation game.

The decision to generate a pseudo operation game is made by the main control device 10 by drawing random numbers for the pseudo operation game lottery. In FIG. 47, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 65,536, and the number of random numbers to be used to determine whether or not to generate a pseudo operation game is shown.

As shown in FIG. 47, in a normal game state in which the game area is the normal area, if the result of the lottery for the role is other than a rare role (small role, replay role, or miss), there is a 65,526/65,536 probability that a pseudo operation game will not occur, and there is a 10/65,536 probability that a pseudo operation game will occur.
Furthermore, in a normal gaming state in which the gaming area is the normal area, if the result of the lottery for the role is a rare role (cherry role, watermelon role, chance role), it is determined with a probability of 65,521/65,536 that a pseudo operation game will not occur, and with a probability of 15/65,536 that a pseudo operation game will occur.

Similarly, in the normal game mode in the advantageous zone, if the lottery result is anything other than a rare role, it is determined that a pseudo-operation game will occur with a probability of 20/65536, and if a rare role is won, it is determined that a pseudo-operation game will occur with a probability of 40/65536.

Similarly, in the CZ state of the favorable zone, if the result of the lottery is anything other than a rare role, it is determined that a pseudo-operation game will occur with a probability of 50/65536, and if a rare role is won, it is determined that a pseudo-operation game will occur with a probability of 100/65536.

Similarly, in the pseudo bonus state of the advantageous zone, if the lottery result is anything other than a rare role, it is determined that a pseudo operation game will occur with a probability of 100/65536, and if a rare role is won, it is determined that a pseudo operation game will occur with a probability of 200/65536.

Similarly, in the AT state of the advantageous zone, if the result of the lottery is anything other than a rare role, it is determined that a pseudo operation game will occur with a probability of 200/65536, and if a rare role is won, it is determined that a pseudo operation game will occur with a probability of 400/65536.

Similarly, during the ending period, it is determined that no pseudo-play will occur regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery.

As described above, the occurrence of a pseudo operation game is determined in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, and a lottery is held for the occurrence of a pseudo operation game based on the lottery results of the role determined by the execution of the game, and if the lottery is won, the pseudo operation game will occur.
When the main control device 10 determines that a pseudo operation game should occur, the pseudo operation game is actually executed a predetermined number of games (for example, three games) after the determination game.
Therefore, the pseudo-operation game is not executed in the game in which the occurrence of the pseudo-operation game has been determined, but the pseudo-operation game is executed after that game.

In addition, the actual execution of the pseudo-operation game may be other than the above, and may be executed in the game in which the occurrence of the pseudo-operation game has been determined, or may be executed randomly within a range of a predetermined number of games (e.g., 1 to 3 games), or may be executed after the execution of a relatively large number of games (e.g., 30 games).
In addition, even when the pseudo-operation game is actually executed after a predetermined number of games, it may be executed based on the lottery result of the role in the game at that time. For example, the pseudo-operation game may be executed on the condition that a lottery result other than a rare role is derived (for example, a replay role is won).

Furthermore, since the main control device 10 conducts a lottery for the occurrence of the above-mentioned pseudo operation game, the probability of the occurrence of the pseudo operation game is higher in the advantageous zone than in the normal zone.
In other words, the main control device 10 is equipped with a probability control means capable of controlling the pseudo game so that the probability of executing the pseudo game (operation pseudo game) is higher in the advantageous zone than in the normal zone.
Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, during the advantageous zone, the aforementioned limiting function (limiter function) is activated and the number of games related to the limiting function is counted based on the execution of the game, but in the main control device 10 of this fourth embodiment, operation pseudo-games (and notification pseudo-games) are excluded from the count of the above-mentioned number of games.
In other words, even if a pseudo game is executed in a given game, the pseudo game is excluded from the count and the number of games is counted only once.

Therefore, even if the probability of occurrence of pseudo-operation games is increased during the advantageous zone, the restriction function will not be activated due to the occurrence of pseudo-operation games, so it is possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied due to the occurrence of pseudo-operation games.
That is, the limit function sets an upper limit on the duration of a single advantageous zone for a player, but if the limit function is activated early due to the occurrence of a pseudo-operation game in which no medals are paid out, medals that should have been obtained due to the occurrence of the pseudo-operation game will not be paid out. In the fourth embodiment, this kind of situation can be prevented by excluding the pseudo-operation game from the count of the number of games related to the limit function.

Furthermore, regardless of the game section and game state, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo-operation game is higher when the lottery result for the role is a rare role than when the lottery result is a role other than the rare role.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means makes it possible to execute a pseudo-game operation based on the derivation by the lottery means of a lottery result which is a winning of a rare role (specific role).
Therefore, when a rare combination is won, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation regarding the occurrence of a pseudo-operation game.

Furthermore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of the result of the lottery, the probability of a pseudo-game occurring increases as the game state transitions from normal game state → CZ state → pseudo-bonus state → AT state in that order.
Therefore, it is possible to form an occurrence mode of highly interesting pseudo-operation games according to the change in the game state. Also, during a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state, the occurrence probability of the pseudo-operation games becomes higher, making it possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, during the ending period, no pseudo operation game occurs.
Therefore, it is possible to progress the game efficiently without giving the player unnecessary expectations.
In other words, when the activation of the restriction function has already been determined in advance, if a pseudo-game operation occurs in which no further bonuses can be awarded, not only will the activation of the restriction function be delayed, but there is also the possibility that it may give the player unnecessary hope, but it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The probability of occurrence of the pseudo operation game may be other than those described above. For example, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo operation game may be 0% during the normal period regardless of the result of the lottery of the role. Also, the probability of occurrence of the pseudo operation game may be 100% during the advantageous period regardless of the result of the lottery of the role, and the probability of occurrence of the pseudo operation game when a predetermined role is won during the advantageous period may be 100%. In other words, any probability may be used as long as the probability of occurrence of the pseudo operation game is higher in the advantageous period than in the normal period.
In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for the occurrence of the pseudo operation game is divided into the winning of the role other than the rare role and the winning of the rare role, but the lottery may be divided into other roles. For example, the occurrence probability of the pseudo operation game may be changed for each type of rare role.
As described above, a lottery for generating an operation pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is carried out.

[Lottery table used when determining the execution mode of the pseudo-operation game in the fourth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the determination control of the execution mode of the pseudo operation game by the main control device 10 in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described.
In this fourth embodiment, as described above, the occurrence of a pseudo operation game is determined based on the result of the lottery for the role, but when the main control unit 10 determines the occurrence of a pseudo operation game, it determines the number of times the pseudo operation game is executed, which is the execution mode of the pseudo operation game in one game, and the pseudo game result (derived result) for each pseudo operation game.

Figure 48 shows a lottery table that is used when the main control device 10 determines the execution mode of the pseudo-operation game after determining that the pseudo-operation game will occur.

The execution mode of the pseudo-game operation is determined by the main control device 10 drawing random numbers for the pseudo-game operation execution mode lottery. In FIG. 48, the range (number) of random numbers to be obtained is set to 256, and the number of random numbers when each execution count and the pseudo-game result (derived result) are determined is shown.

As shown in Figure 48, it is determined that one operation pseudo game will be executed with a probability of 100/256 in which the pseudo game result (derived result) will be a "miss", and it is determined that one operation pseudo game will be executed with a probability of 56/256 in which the pseudo game result (derived result) will be a rare role.
In addition, with a probability of 50/256, it is decided to execute two pseudo operation games in which the pseudo game results are derived in the order of "miss" → "miss", with a probability of 20/256, it is decided to execute two pseudo operation games in which the pseudo game results are derived in the order of "miss" → "rare role", with a probability of 20/256, it is decided to execute two pseudo operation games in which the pseudo game results are derived in the order of "rare role" → "miss", and with a probability of 10/256, it is decided to execute two pseudo operation games in which the pseudo game results are derived in the order of "rare role" → "rare role".

It should be noted that the pseudo game result of "loss" refers to a losing symbol combination in which the symbol combination that is pseudo-stopped on reel 4 as a result of the operation pseudo game does not correspond to any winning combination.
The main control device 10 randomly selects and derives one of a plurality of preset losing symbol combinations as the pseudo game result, but instead of the losing symbol combination, a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role other than a rare role may be derived as the pseudo game result.

On the other hand, the "rare role" is either a cherry role, a watermelon role, or a chance role, and the main control unit 10 randomly selects and derives a symbol combination corresponding to any of the rare roles, but the symbol combination corresponding to each rare role may be derived as a pseudo-game result in a ratio that corresponds to the winning probability of each rare role in a normal game.

In the fourth embodiment, the bonus is selected based on the pseudo game result in the pseudo operation game in the same manner as in a normal game. For example, when a pseudo game result corresponding to a strong cherry role is derived in the pseudo operation game during the normal game state (advantageous zone), the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state is set to be 12% in setting 1, 14% in setting 2, 16% in setting 3, 18% in setting 4, 20% in setting 5, and 22% in setting 6, which means that the probability of winning the pseudo bonus state is set to be higher than in a normal game.
Also, during other game states (e.g., AT state), a lottery for a bonus (such as a lottery for adding the number of games) is conducted for the pseudo-game result in the pseudo-game operation, just like in a normal game, but the pseudo-game result in the pseudo-game operation is set so that the probability of winning a bonus is higher than that of a normal game.

The winning probability of the bonus for the simulated game result in the simulated operation game may be any probability as long as the probability of the bonus being awarded is higher when a rare role is won than when a non-rare role is won, and the winning probability of the bonus being awarded may be changed for each type of rare role.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for the award of a bonus for the pseudo game result in the pseudo operation game is conducted by the main control device 10 at the time when the pseudo game result in the pseudo operation game is determined in advance, and the lottery result is stored and retained so that the bonus is awarded at a predetermined time after the pseudo operation game is executed, but the lottery for the award of a bonus may be conducted at the time when the pseudo operation game is actually executed, or at the end of the game in which the pseudo operation game is actually executed.

In addition, when a predetermined role (for example, a rare role) is won, a lottery for awarding a bonus may be held, and the execution of the pseudo game and the type of pseudo game result may be determined based on the result of the lottery for awarding the bonus.
For example, when a pseudo bonus state is entered based on the winning of a specified rare role, a pseudo operation game may then be executed (once or twice) so as to increase the probability of deriving a pattern combination corresponding to the rare role during the pseudo operation game.
Therefore, in this case, the pseudo-game operation is executed as a performance for the lottery for awarding a special prize.

In addition, although a single lottery table is used to determine the execution mode of the pseudo-operation game regardless of the game state, the probability of determining the execution mode of the pseudo-operation game may be changed depending on the type of game state currently in effect.

As described above, since the execution mode of the pseudo-operation game is determined in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the pseudo-operation game is executed, the probability of deriving a pseudo-game result corresponding to a rare role is higher than in a normal game, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectations.
In addition, the pseudo operation game as the second game can be executed multiple times in one game, so that the probability of the pseudo operation game being executed once is relatively higher than the probability of it being executed twice.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress pseudo-game operations related to the awarding of the bonus to a certain extent.

Furthermore, when the operation pseudo game is executed twice, the probability that a pseudo game result corresponding to a rare role will be derived in either operation pseudo game becomes high.
Therefore, when the pseudo operation game is executed twice, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

In this embodiment, the number of times the operation pseudo game is to be executed is determined in advance, but each time an operation pseudo game is executed, whether or not the next operation pseudo game is to be executed may be determined by lottery.
In addition, the result of the pseudo game in the pseudo operation game may also be determined at the time when the pseudo operation game is executed.
As described above, the determination control of the execution mode of the pseudo operation game in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is performed.

Next, the start of rotation of the reel 4 when the main game starts after the end of the notification pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG.
As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, for example, a pseudo-game can be executed in the first game when the game state transitions to a game state advantageous to the player, such as a pseudo-bonus state.

Then, after this notification pseudo game is executed, the actual game is executed, and in the main control device 10 of the fourth embodiment, the rotation start mode of the reel 4 when starting this actual game can be selectively executed from one of a plurality of start modes.
Specifically, the main control device 10 can execute two rotation start modes for the reel 4 when starting the game: a normal rotation start mode in which all of the reels 4a to 4c start rotating simultaneously (simultaneously or approximately simultaneously), and a specific rotation start mode in which each of the reels 4a to 4c starts rotating with a predetermined time difference, and can selectively execute one of the rotation start modes based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination in the game.
Hereinafter, the manner in which the reel 4 starts to rotate will be described with a specific example.

[Timing chart for explaining the start state of the reels when the push order navigation is executed after the notification pseudo game in the fourth embodiment]
First, FIG. 49 shows a timing chart when the first game in the pseudo bonus state is executed by the main control device 10 and the push order bell role is won in the first game.
In other words, Figure 49 shows a case where, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, in the main game after the end of the notification pseudo game, the push order navigation corresponding to the winning push order bell role is executed on the main display 8.

First, after the transition to the pseudo bonus state, when the player operates the start lever 3 to perform the initial start operation (timing t50) to start the game, a game accompanied by a notification pseudo game is executed and the reel 4 begins to rotate.
As described above, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, the notification pseudo game starts in the first half of the game. At this time, the main controller 10 starts all of the reels 4a to 4c spinning simultaneously (at the same time or nearly at the same time) in the same way as when a normal game starts.
In addition, during the notification pseudo-game, push order navigation is not executed.
If a wait time is inserted because the time since the start of the previous game is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the rotation of reels 4a to 4c will begin in the same manner as described above after the wait time has elapsed since the start operation.

Next, at a point (timing t51) when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start operation (timing t50), the left reel 4a is automatically and pseudo-stopped.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the pseudo-stop of the left reel 4a, the center reel 4b is automatically pseudo-stopped.
Finally, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the center reel 4b came to a pseudo-stop (timing 52), the right reel 4c is automatically brought to a pseudo-stop, and all of the reels 4a to 4c come to a pseudo-stop.
Then, when all the reels 4a to 4c come to a pseudo stop, a symbol combination (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") is derived which indicates the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state.

The time from the start operation until the left reel 4a automatically stops and the stopping intervals of each reel 4 may be any as long as each reel 4 stops in sequence after a predetermined time from the start operation. Also, the stopping order of each reel 4 may be other than the above-mentioned left reel 4a → center reel 4b → right reel 4c.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the pseudo stop of the right reel 4c (timing t53), the main game is started and the reel 4 is spun again.
When the main control device 10 spins the reel 4 in this game, the start mode of the spin is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery for the role in this game, i.e., the result of the lottery for the role drawn at the time of the start operation of the first game in the pseudo bonus state, and the spinning of the reel 4 is started based on this determination result.

Specifically, if the lottery result for the role in this game is a winning push order bell role, the reel 4 starts to rotate in a normal rotation start mode in which all of the reels 4a to 4c start to rotate simultaneously (simultaneously or approximately simultaneously), and if the lottery result for the role in this game is a winning color bell role, the reel 4 starts to rotate in a specific rotation start mode in which each of the reels 4a to 4c starts to rotate with a predetermined time difference.

In other words, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, in which the stop operation mode is notified by the first notification means, the main control device 10, which serves as the special effect control means, is capable of controlling the reel not to start spinning in a specific spin start mode, which is a control that changes the variable display means in a special mode, between the execution of the notification pseudo game (special effect) and the execution of the main game (normal variable display).

This is because when color navigation, which requires eye-pressing, is executed, if all of the reels 4a to 4c start to rotate at the same time, the player will be able to recognize the positional relationship (phase difference) of the patterns on each reel 4 while they are spinning, which may assisted the player in pressing the buttons with their eyes, whereas when push order navigation, which does not require eye-pressing, is executed, such a problem does not arise.
In particular, since the "red 7A" symbol is aligned when the pseudo-game is played, it becomes easier to recognize the relative positions of the symbols based on the aligned "red 7A", and the possibility of assistance in pressing the buttons increases when the color navigation is played. Also, there is a risk that dissatisfaction will occur between players depending on whether or not they recognize the relative positions of the symbols.
However, as mentioned above, the Push Order Bell role does not require any eye-pressing to begin with, so even if all of the reels 4a to 4c start spinning at the same time when the Push Order Bell role is won, there is no possibility of the above-mentioned problems occurring.

Therefore, Figure 49 shows a case where the push order bell role is won in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, and as shown in the figure, at the start of this game, the normal rotation start mode is selected and all of the reels 4 start spinning simultaneously without any operation by the player.
In addition, when this game starts, push order navigation will be executed on the main display 8.
It is preferable that, when the reel 4 starts to rotate in the normal rotation start mode, a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 9 and the lamp 11 is illuminated in a corresponding light emitting mode.

Then, when the rotation speed of all the reels 4 reaches a steady rotation speed (timing t54), operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective, making it possible to stop the reels 4, and the game ends (main stop) when the last reel 4 is stopped (timing t55).
Figure 49 shows an example of a case where a push order bell role is won, which stops the reels 4 in the order of left reel 4a → middle reel 4b → right reel 4c, so the reels 4 stop in the order of left reel 4a → middle reel 4b → right reel 4c.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the main game is started after the notification pseudo game is ended, if the push order bell role is won in the main game, the normal rotation start mode is selected as the rotation start mode of the reel 4, and all of the reels 4 start rotating at the same time.
Therefore, when the push order bell role is won in this game, the reel 4 will start to rotate in the same manner as in other games, making it possible to play a highly entertaining game without giving the player a sense of discomfort when the reel 4 starts to rotate.
Furthermore, even if the reel 4 starts to rotate in the normal rotation start mode, no eye-pressing operation is required to win the push order bell role, so there are no problems with eye-pressing assistance.

In addition, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, even if the lottery result is a common bell role, a replay role, or a miss, no eye-pressing operation is required, so the normal spin start mode may be selected.
As described above, the reel 4 starts to rotate in the normal rotation start mode.

[Timing chart for explaining the start state of the reel when the color navigation is executed after the notification pseudo game in the fourth embodiment]
Next, FIG. 50 shows a timing chart when the first game in the pseudo bonus state is executed by the main control device 10 and a color bell role is won in the first game.
That is, Figure 50 shows a case where, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, in the main game after the end of the notification pseudo game, the color navigation corresponding to the winning color bell role is executed on the main display 8.

First, after the transition to the pseudo bonus state, when the player performs the initial start operation (timing t56) to start the game by operating the start lever 3, a game accompanied by a notification pseudo game is executed and the reel 4 begins to rotate.
As described above, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, the notification pseudo game starts in the first half of the game. At this time, the main controller 10 starts the rotation of the reels 4a to 4c all at once (simultaneously or nearly simultaneously), in the same manner as when a normal game starts.
In addition, during the notification pseudo-game, color navigation is not executed.
If a wait time is inserted because the time since the start of the previous game is less than a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds), the rotation of reels 4a to 4c will begin in the same manner as described above after the wait time has elapsed since the start operation.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (timing t57) from the start operation (timing t56), the left reel 4a is automatically pseudo-stopped in the same manner as described above.
Next, when a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed since the pseudo-stop of the left reel 4a, the center reel 4b is automatically pseudo-stopped.
Finally, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the center reel 4b came to a pseudo-stop (timing t58), the right reel 4c is automatically brought to a pseudo-stop, and all of the reels 4a to 4c come to a pseudo-stop.
Then, when all the reels 4a to 4c come to a pseudo stop, a symbol combination (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") is derived which indicates the occurrence of a pseudo bonus state.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the pseudo stop of the right reel 4c (timing t59a), the main game is started and the reel 4 starts spinning again.
Figure 50 shows a case where a color bell role is won in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, and as described above, the main control device 10 starts the rotation of the reel 4 in this game in a specific rotation start mode.

In addition, when any of the colored bell roles is won in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, the main control device 10 determines a specific spin start mode as the spin start mode of the reel 4 in this game, and at the same time, the type of the specific spin start mode is determined in advance.
Specifically, one of six possible rotation start sequences for reels 4a to 4c is determined based on a random number drawing, and further, the rotation start delay time between each reel 4 is determined based on a random number drawing from a plurality of delay times.

For example, if it is determined that the reels 4a to 4c in this game will start rotating in the order of center reel 4b → right reel 4c → left reel 4a, and the delay time for the start of rotation of the reel 4 that starts rotating second is determined to be 1 second, and the delay time for the start of rotation of the reel 4 that starts rotating third is determined to be 1.5 seconds, then the center reel 4b will start rotating first, then 1 second later the right reel 4c will start rotating, and 1.5 seconds later the left reel 4a will start rotating.
As long as the reels 4a to 4c start spinning at random, the number of types of delay times and their values may be any, or the spin start order and each delay time may be determined using a table in which the spin start order and each delay time are predetermined. Also, only the spin start order may be determined, and the delay times may be the same.

In other words, in a game in which Color Navi is executed, in which the stop operation mode is notified by the second notification means, the main control device 10, as a special effect control means, is capable of controlling the reel to start spinning in a specific spin start mode, which is a control that changes the variable display means in a special mode, between the execution of the notification pseudo-game (special effect) and the execution of the main game (normal variable display).
Therefore, in this game, when the reel 4 starts to rotate, the reel 4 starts to rotate in a specific rotation start mode of a type that is predetermined at the start of the first game.

Figure 50 shows an example in which the rotation start order of the reels 4a to 4c is determined to be left reel 4a → center reel 4b → right reel 4c, the rotation start delay time for the center reel 4b is determined to be 1 second, and the rotation start delay time for the right reel 4c is determined to be 1.5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, at the start of this game (timing t59a), a specific spin start mode is selected and first the left reel 4a automatically starts spinning.
Next, one second after the left reel 4a starts to spin (timing t59b), the center reel 4b automatically starts to spin.
Finally, 1.5 seconds after the center reel 4b starts to spin (timing t59c), the right reel 4c automatically starts to spin.

In other words, when the main control device 10, which serves as the special effect control means, executes control to cause the variable display means to vary in a special manner, it is capable of executing control to cause the reels 4a to 4c, which serve as the multiple individual variable display means, to each start varying at different times.

Furthermore, when the game starts, the color navigation is executed on the main display 8.
It is preferable that, when the reel 4 starts to rotate in a specific rotation start mode, a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 9 and the lamp 11 is illuminated in a corresponding illumination mode.

Then, when the rotation speed of all the reels 4 reaches a steady rotation speed (timing t60), operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective, making it possible to stop the reels 4, and the game ends (main stop) when the last reel 4 is stopped (timing t61).
Figure 50 shows an example in which an eye-pressing operation is first performed to target the special symbol on the left reel 4a, and then the middle reel 4b and right reel 4c are stopped in that order, so the reels 4 stop in the order of left reel 4a → middle reel 4b → right reel 4c.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the main game is started after the notification pseudo game is ended, if a color bell role is won in the main game, a specific rotation start mode is selected as the rotation start mode of reel 4, and each of reels 4a to 4c starts rotating with a predetermined time difference.
As a result, since it becomes impossible to recognize the relative positions of the symbols on each reel 4, even if a colored bell role that requires eye-pressing is won, the manner in which the reel 4 starts to spin in this game can be prevented from assisting in eye-pressing to aim for a specific symbol, and it becomes possible to provide an equal opportunity for all players to play, preventing only certain players from gaining an advantage.

In addition, in the first game in the pseudo bonus state, if a rare role is won, a pressing operation is required, so a specific spin start mode may be selected.
As described above, the reel 4 starts to rotate in the specific rotation start mode.

In the fourth embodiment of the slot machine 1, the reel 4 starts to rotate in a normal spin start mode or a specific spin start mode after the notification pseudo game is executed. However, during a pseudo bonus state or an AT state where push order navigation or color navigation may be executed, a pseudo operation game can also be executed. Therefore, when a pseudo operation game is executed during a pseudo bonus state or an AT state, at the start of the game after the pseudo operation game is executed, the reel 4 may start to rotate in a normal spin start mode or a specific spin start mode based on the lottery result of the role at that time, similar to the notification pseudo game.

As explained above, in the present invention, in a gaming machine (slot machine 1) in which a game is executed based on the operation by a player and, as a result of the game, a stop mode according to the lottery result of a role can be derived to a variable display means composed of a plurality of individual variable display means, the gaming machine includes a first notification means (sub-controller 20) capable of notifying the player in a recognizable manner of a stop operation mode for deriving the first specific stop mode in a game in which a first specific stop mode can be derived to the variable display means, a second notification means (sub-controller 20) capable of notifying the player in a recognizable manner of a stop operation mode for deriving the second specific stop mode in a game in which a second specific stop mode can be derived to the variable display means, and a special effect that, in a specified game, invalidates operations related to the execution of the game and causes the variable display means to execute a special effect involving a special variable display, and then causes the variable display means to execute a normal variable display. The game system includes a control means (main control device 10), and the first notification means is capable of notifying the stop operation sequence for the plurality of individual variable display means as the stop operation mode for deriving the first specific stop mode, the second notification means is capable of notifying the stop operation mode for deriving a specific pattern from a specific individual variable display means as the stop operation mode for deriving the second specific stop mode, and the special effect control means is configured to be controllable so as not to execute control for causing the variable display means to vary in a special mode between executing the special effect and executing the normal variable display in a game in which the stop operation mode is notified by the first notification means, and to be controllable so as to execute control for causing the variable display means to vary in a special mode between executing the special effect and executing the normal variable display in a game in which the stop operation mode is notified by the second notification means.

Here, the first notification means, the second notification means, and the special performance control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or in the sub-control device 20. Also, they may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.
Furthermore, the predetermined individual variation display means may be all of the plurality of individual variation display means, or may be some of the plurality of individual variation display means.

Therefore, the variable display means can vary in its variable mode between the execution of the special performance and the execution of the normal variable display, making it possible to enhance the entertainment value of the game.
Furthermore, in games in which the stop operation mode is notified by the first notification means, control is performed such that control to cause the variable display means to vary in a special manner is not executed between the execution of the special performance and the execution of the normal variable display, making it possible to perform the variable display of the variable display means without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in games in which the stop operation mode is notified by the second notification means, control is performed to cause the variable display means to vary in a special mode between the execution of the special performance and the execution of the normal variable display, so that the variable display mode in the variable display means can be prevented from serving as an aid in deriving a specific stop mode, and it becomes possible to provide equal playing opportunities to all players.

In addition, the special effect control means is configured to be capable of executing control for causing the multiple individual variable display means to start varying at different times when the variable display means changes in a special manner.
Therefore, in a game in which the stop operation pattern is notified by the second notification means, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display pattern in the above-mentioned variable display means from assisting in deriving a specific stop pattern.

The game machine further includes a first specific game state control means (main control device 10) capable of generating a first specific game state advantageous to the player by activating the first notification means, and a second specific game state control means (main control device 10) capable of generating a second specific game state advantageous to the player by activating the first notification means and the second notification means, and the second specific game state control means is configured to determine the upper limit number of times that the second notification means notifies the stop operation mode when the second specific game state is generated, and to end the second specific game state when a game that corresponds to the upper limit number of times is played in the second specific game state.

Therefore, various specific game states with different notification modes of the notification means can be generated, making the game more entertaining.
Furthermore, the duration for which the second specific game state can continue is not fixed but changes in various ways, so that a variety of execution modes for the second specific game state are formed, making it possible to generate a highly entertaining second specific game state.
The first specific game state control means and the second specific game state control may be provided in the main control device 10 or in the sub-control device 20. Also, they may be configured by the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 working together.

The device is also configured to include a selection means (main control device 10) that allows the player to select whether to activate the second notification means in addition to activating the first notification means when the first specific game state occurs.

Therefore, it becomes possible to generate a first specific gaming state according to the player's preference, and it becomes possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction.
The selection means may be provided in the main control unit 10 or in the sub-control unit 20. Also, the selection means may be configured by the main control unit 10 and the sub-control unit 20 working together.

On the other hand, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which the variable display can be stopped multiple times in one variable display game, thereby giving the player multiple opportunities to perform a stopping operation.
However, conventional gaming machines have not been sufficient in terms of increasing the entertainment value of the game or enhancing the player's expectations.
In this way, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can solve all or part of the problems that need to be improved in conventional gaming machines.

The above describes a preferred embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, it goes without saying that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention.
For example, in this embodiment, the AT state (AT) is granted as a privilege, but it is also possible to grant ART or RT.

In addition, in this embodiment, the type of AT state is a type that can continue the AT state multiple times in units of a specified number of games, but it may also be a type that ends when there are no more games remaining in the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 2d and the upper effect button 2f are exemplified as operation means, but other means may be used as long as they output an input signal when operated by the player, such as the bet button 2a, the stop button 5, the start lever 3, etc.

In addition, the front door 1a may be provided with a vibration means for vibrating the front door 1a by activating a motor, speaker, etc., and the vibration means may be activated at a specified time during the winning performance, premonition performance, and notice performance to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, or the vibration means may be activated when the winning performance, premonition performance, and selection performance are executed.
In addition, a ventilation means for blowing air toward the player may be provided on the front door 1a, and the ventilation means may be operated at a predetermined time during the winning performance, the premonition performance, and the selection performance to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, a main display 8 and a sub-display 17 are provided as display means, but the winning effects, premonition effects, and selection effects may be performed on one of the display means, or on both of the two display means.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control unit 10 performed operations as various means such as a lottery means, but the sub-control unit 20 may perform some or all of these operations and operate as the various means.
Conversely, the main control unit 10 can perform some or all of the operations executed by the sub-control unit 20, and the main control unit 10 can operate as various means.

Furthermore, although the present invention is applied to a slot machine, it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko (for example, ball slot).
The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines that can execute games using pseudo gaming media in data format, without using actual gaming media such as medals or gaming balls.

1: Slot machine 2: Bet button 4: Reels 5: Stop button 8: Main display 10: Main control device 17: Sub display 20: Sub control device

Claims (1)

a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state to which a transition can be made from the first game state;
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
a first game control means for executing a first game, the first game being capable of providing a game value for executing the game, with the variable display of the variable display means;
A second game control means for executing a second game, which is a pseudo game to which the game value cannot be awarded, with a variable display of the variable display means;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination when the first game is executed;
In the first gaming state, based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means,
A point giving means capable of giving points;
a point storage means capable of storing points awarded by the point awarding means;
a determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second gaming state based on the points stored in the point storage means;
Equipped with
The winning combination includes:
A first winning combination and a second winning combination different from the first winning combination are included,
The point giving means is
When the first winning combination is determined, the control is performed so as to award points;
When the second winning combination is determined, more points are awarded than when the first winning combination is determined ;
The variable display means is
Based on the determination by the determining means that the game state is to be shifted to the second game state, the variable display of the symbol in the second game state can be stopped and displayed in a specific manner .
The game machine includes a notification means capable of executing a notification based on the points stored in the point storage means when the variable display means notifies an operation for stopping and displaying the symbol information variably displayed in the second game in the specific mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images